catalog contactoare

W POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W MODULAR CONTACTORS

w MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

w THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

W MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A

CONNECTING COMPETENCE.

E N E R G Y I N D U S T R Y B U I L D I N G S S A F E T Y D A T A C A B L E L I G H T

ALEA

GENERAL INFORMATION

W GENERAL INFORMATION

• All dimensioned drawings are displayed within the confines of available space on the page and are only intended as a guide.

• All circuit diagrams are schematic wiring diagrams which are intended to allow better understanding of the function, and

will need to be edited/added to during the course of project planning.

• All images represent samples of the product and are intended for information purposes only.

Unless otherwise stipulated, the current version of the General Terms of Delivery issued by The Association of the Austrian Electrical

and Electronics Industries “FEEI” shall apply. No liability for errors in text, type or images; we reserve the right to make changes to techni-

cal specifications of the product range. The user information contained in this catalog reflect the opinion of the company at the time

of writing. The information contained in it was assembled on the basis of published norms, specialist industry presentations, specia-

list literature and in-house expertise. The content is for informational purposes only and has no validity in law.

W SCHRACK PRODUCT QUALITY

We offer our customers a well sorted product range offering the highest levels of product availability. Our aim is ultra-

efficiency when it comes to customerspecific solutions. This is possible thanks to standardized work processes, modularisation

and the use of software aids.

W SCHRACK ISO-CERTIFIZIED

In recent times, testing procedures for ISO certification have shifted their focus very strongly on how organisations deal with

customers, and the associated customer processes. Some of the major areas which are inspected include:

• General customer communication

• Dealing with offers and tenders in a structured manner

• Transparency in all areas of the company in direct or indirect contact with customers

• The above is required in all tiers of management

ISO certification is by no means the norm. Our ISO certification 9001:2000 is both a reward as well as an obligation. The

obligation we have in accepting this certification is to ensure the documentation of our work processes and to continuously

improve such processes.

W WELCOME TO SCHRACK TECHNIK

We are a leading, sales-oriented brand company from Austria specialising in the areas of energy, data and lighting systems.

Our activities focus on products and solutions for energy optimisation, safety, data transfer and comfort. High-quality

products, technical expertise and one-to-one customer service are at the fore of what we do.

INDEX

Page

1

w ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORSOVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ Page 4GENERAL INFORMATIONS.......................................................................................... Page 13PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ............................................................................ Page 18TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 3DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 100SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 112

w BZ MODULAR CONTACTORSPRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ............................................................................ Page 124TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... Page 126DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 129SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 130

w LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORSPRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ............................................................................ Page 134TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... Page 136DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 139SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 140

w ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYSOVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ Page 144GENERAL INFORMATIONS.......................................................................................... Page 146PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ............................................................................ Page 149TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... Page 151ACCESSORIES............................................................................................................ Page 156CHARACTERISTIC CURVES .......................................................................................... Page 157DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 158SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 159

w LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORSPRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ............................................................................ Page 162TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... Page 163DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 166SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 167

w ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100AOVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ Page 170GENERAL INFORMATIONS.......................................................................................... Page 173PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ............................................................................ Page 176TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... Page 182ACCESSORIES............................................................................................................ Page 188CHARACTERISTIC CURVES .......................................................................................... Page 190DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 191SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 195

w INDEXALPHABETICAL INDEX ................................................................................................ Page 196LIST OF ARTICLES ...................................................................................................... Page 198

ALEA POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

Page

2

LSHD / LSHD-PLC

LSD0 / LSS0-PLC

TOP-TECHNIC

LSD2 / LSD3 / LSD6

TOP-TECHNIC

LSDD / LSSD-PLC

TOP-TECHNICTOP-TECHNIC

LSDE / LSDG LSDH



Page

3


w CONTENTS

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 4

GENERAL INFORMATIONS ............................................................................ Page 13

PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ........................................................ Page 18

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... Page 33

DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 100

SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 112

POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

Page

4

SIZE 00 00 0 2

TYPE LSHD LSDD / LSSD 1) LSD0 / LSS0 LSD2

CONTACTORS AND VACUUM CONTACTORS

TYPE / AC, DC OPERATION 06 07 09 12 09 12 17 25 32 40 50

AC-3

Ie/AC-3/400 V 6A 7A 9A 12A 9A 12A 17A 25A 32A 40A 50A

400 V 3A 3kW 4kW 5.5kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW

230 V -- 2.2kW 3kW 3kW 3kW 3kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW

500 V 2A 3.5kW 4.5kW 5.5kW 4.5kW 7.5kW 10kW 11kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW

690 V 1A 4kW 5.5kW 5.5kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 11kW 18.5kW 22kW 22kW

1 000 V -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

AC-4 (FOR IA = 6 X IE)

400 V -- 3kW 4kW 4kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 7.5kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW

400 V (200 000 operating cycles) -- 1.15kW 2kW 2kW 2kW 2.6kW 3.5kW 4.4kW 8.2kW 9.5kW 12.6kW

AC-1 (40 °C, ≤ 690 V)

Ie 10A 18A 22A 22A 40A 40A 40A 40A 50A 60A 60A

ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS

AUXILIARY CONTACTS front LSZDH.. LSZDH.../LSZDD.../LSZD0 LSZ0D... LSZ0D...

AND CONTACT BLOCKS LSZD0..

lateral -- -- LSZ0D7.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ0D9..

TERMINAL COVERS -- -- -- LSZ2D...

SURGE SUPPRESSORS LSZH0... LSZD.... LSZ0.... LSZ2D....

OVERLOAD RELAYS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: OVERLOAD RELAYS)

LST, thermal, Class 10 -- LSTD.... 0.1 ... 12 A LST0.... 2.5 ... 25 A LST2.... 10 ... 50 A

MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS)

TYPE BES -- BESD 0.16 ... 12 A Size 00 BES0 0.16 ... 25 A BES2 25 ... 50 A

BESD 0.16 ... 12 A Size 0

LINK MODULES LSZ -- LSZDD005, LSZDD006 LSZ0D002 (AC), LSZ0D004 (DC) LSZ2D004 (AC), LSZ2D005 (DC)

REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

COMPLETE UNITS TYPE LSW -- LSWD07.. LSWD09.. LSWD12.. -- LSW012.. LSW017.. LSW025.. LSW232.. LSW240.. LSW250..

400 V -- 3kW 4kW 5.5kW -- 5.5kW 7.5kW 12kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW

WIRING SETS -- LSZDW001 LSZDW001 LSZ2W001

MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS -- in wiring set included LSZ0W002 LSZ0W002

CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING

COMPLETE UNITS TYPE LSY -- LSYD17.. LSY032.. LSY25033

400 V -- 7.5kW 15kW 22kW

WIRING SETS -- LSZDW001 LSZ0Y001 LSZ2Y003

1) no auxillary contacts for PLC-use types possible

W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE – OVERVIEW

LSHD / LSHD-PLC 1) LSDD / LSSD-PLC 1) LSD0 / LSS0-PLC LSD2


3 6 10 12 14

LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH

65 80 95 11 15 2) 19 2) 22 26 30 41 51 63/64 82/83

65A 80A 95A 115A 150A 185A 225A 265A 300A 400A 500A 630A 820A

30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 250kW 335kW 450kW

18.5kW 22kW 22kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 260kW


45kW 55kW 55kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 250kW 250kW 400kW 400/500kW 600kW 800kW

30kW 37kW 37kW 75kW 90kW 90kW 90/315kW 132/355kW 132/400kW 250/560kW 250/710kW 600kW 800kW


15.1kW 17.9kW 22kW 29kW 38kW 45kW 54/78kW 66/93kW 71/112kW 84/140kW 98/161kW 168kW 191kW

100A 120A 120A 160A 185A 215A 275/330A 330A 330A 430/610A 610A 700A 910A

LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... --

LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. --

LSZ3D... LSZ6D... LSZED... LSZED... LSZHD...

LSZ2.... LSZ6.... LSZ6.... LSZ6.... included

LST3 25 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

BES3 63 ... 100 A -- -- -- --

LS3D003 (AC), LS3D004 (DC)

LSW365.. LSW380.. LSW395.. -- -- -- --

30kW 37kW 45kW -- -- -- --

LSZ3W001 -- -- -- --

LSZ0W002 -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- --

-- -- -- -- --

2) without box-terminals

W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE – OVERVIEW

LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH


Page

6

W LSDD CONTACTORS, LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE AND LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W SIZE 00 WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES

1. Contactor LSDD2. Contactor LSSD and auxiliary contactors LSHD8. 1-pole auxiliary contact block, cable entry from below

10. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations according to EN 50005 and EN 50012)

13. Solder pin adapter for contactors and auxiliary contactors16. Surge suppressor17. 3-phase feeder terminal18. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without terminal19. Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with terminal20. Link for paralleling, 4-pole, with terminal

For contactors LSDD

For LSSD contactors for PLC-use and LSHD auxiliary contactors

The ALEA generation of controls is a complete, modular system family, logically designed right down to the last detail, fromthe basic units to the accessories.


Page

7

W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 AND LSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW

W SIZES 0 TO 3 WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES

For sizes 0 to 3:1. Contactor, size 02. Contactor, size 23. Contactor, size 39. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations

according to EN 50005 and EN 50012)10. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without

connection terminal11. Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with terminal12. 2-pole auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable left or

right (terminal designations according to EN 50012)13. Single-pole auxiliary contact (up to 4 can be snapped on)14. Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable16. Wiring modules on the top and bottom (reversing duty)17. Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode assembly),

can be mounted on the top or bottom (different for size 0, 2 and 3)

Only for sizes 2 and 3:22. Terminal cover for box terminals

Only for size 3:23. Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections24. Auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole

Accessories identical for sizes 0 to 3

Accessories different according to size


Page

8

W LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W SIZES 6 TO 12 WITH ACCESSORIES

1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 123. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations

according to EN 50005 and EN 50012)6. Single-pole auxiliary contact (up to 4 can be snapped on)7. 2-pole auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable left or

right (terminal designations according to EN 50012)(identical for sizes 0 to 12)

8. Surge suppressor (RC element), for plugging into top ofwithdrawable coil

9. Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,different for sizes 6, 10 and 12

10. Terminal cover for box terminal, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12

11. Box terminal block, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12





Page

9

W LSD CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, LSD CONTACTORS SIZE 6 WITH ACCESSORIES

1. LSD contactors, size 62. Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable3. Wiring modules on the top and bottom4. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through

hole5. Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,

different for sizes 6, 10 and 126. Terminal cover for box terminal, different for sizes 6, 10

and 127. Box terminal block, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12




Page

10

W LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, LSD CONTACTORS SIZE 10 AND 12 WITH ACCESSORIES

1. LSD contactors, sizes 10 and 12 or LSD 2. Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable3. Wiring modules on the top and bottom4. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through

hole5. Terminal cover for box terminal, different for sizes 6, 10

and 126. Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,

different for sizes 6, 10 and 12




Page

11

W LSD CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W LSD CONTACTORS SIZES 6 TO 12 WITH ACCESSORIES

1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 12 3. Withdrawable coils for LSD contactors with conventional

operating mechanism6. Surge suppressor (RC element), plug-mountable on

withdrawable coils

Identical for sizes 6 to 12

Different according to size


Page

12

The ALEA generation of controls is a complete, modular system family, logically designed right down to the last detail, fromthe basic units to the accessories.

W AC AND DC OPERATIONIEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660)The LSHD Auxiliary contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The LSHD Auxiliary contactors have screw or Cage Clamp terminals. Four contacts are available in the basic unit. (Cage Clamp on request)

W AUXILIARY CONTACTORS SIZE 00, WITH ACCESSORIES

1. Auxiliary contactor 2. Auxiliary contactor for PLC-use8. 1-pole auxiliary contact block, cable entry from below

10. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations according to EN 50005)13. Solder pin adapter for aux contactor 16. Surge suppressor

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

iliary


Page

13

W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW –GENERAL INFORMATIONS

AC AND DC OPERATIONIEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660). The LSD contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Sizesize 00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic unit. The basic units of sizes 0 to 3 contain only the maincurrent paths. All basic units can be extended with auxiliary contacts and contact blocks.

CONNECTION METHODSThe LSD contactors are available with screw terminals (box terminals and connecting bars) or with Cage Clamp terminals.The size 3 contactors have removable box terminals for the main conductor connections. This permits connection of ring terminal lugs or busbars.

CONTACT RELIABILITYIf voltages ≤ 110 V and current ≤ 100 mA are to be switched, the auxiliary contacts of the LSD contactor or LSH auxiliarycontactor should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact reliability. These auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V.

SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION OF THE CONTACTORSShort-circuit protection of the contactors without overload relay, see Technical specifications. For short-circuit protection ofthe contactors with overload relay, see "Thermal Overload Relays". To assemble fuseless motor feeders you must select combinations of motor protection switches (MPS) and contactor.

MOTOR PROTECTIONLST thermal overload relays can be fitted to the LSD contactors for protection against overload. The overload relays must beordered separately.

RATINGS OF INDUCTION MOTORSThe quoted rating (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor shaft (according to the nameplate).

SURGE SUPPRESSIONLSD contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diodefor short break times) for damping opening surges in the coil. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size 00contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary contact block. For sizes 0 to 3 contactors, varistors andRC elements can be snapped on either on the top or directly below the coil terminals. Diode assemblies are available in 2 different versions on account of their polarity. Depending on the application they can be connected either only at the bottom (assembly with MPS) or only at the top (assembly with overload relay). The plug-in direction of the diodes and diodeassemblies is specified by coding.Exceptions:LSZD0006, in this case the plug-in direction is marked with "+" and "-"Auxiliary contactors are supplied either without surge suppression or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, according to the version.Note:The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).

W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, SIZES 00 TO 3, UP TO 45 kW


Page

14

The magnetic coil is switched directly on and off with the control supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2.

MULTI-VOLTAGE RANGE FOR THE CONTROL SUPPLY VOLTAGE US:Several closely adjacent control supply voltages, available around the world, are covered by just one coil, for example 110-115-120-127 V UC or 220-230-240 V UC. In addition, allowance is also made for a coil operating range of 0.8 timesthe lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper (Us max) rated control supply voltage within which the contactor switchesreliably and no thermal overloading occurs.


• LSD contactors for switching motors• LSR contactors for AC-1 applications

UC OPERATIONThe contactors can be operated with AC (40 to 60 Hz) as well as with DC.

WITHDRAWABLE COILSFor simple coil replacement, e.g. if the application is replaced, the magnetic coil can be pulled out upwards after the releasemechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any other coil of the same size.

AUXILIARY CONTACT COMPLEMENTThe contactors can be fitted with up to 8 auxiliary contacts (identical auxiliary contact blocks from sizes 0 to 12). Of these,no more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts.

W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, SIZES 6 TO 12, > 45 TO 250 kW


Page

15

W LSS, LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW –GENERAL INFORMATIONS

Various auxiliary contact blocks can be added to the contactor basic units depending on the application:

LSSD, LSDD CONTACTORSTerminal designations according to EN 50012.

Size 00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basicunit.

Contactors with a NO contact as auxiliary contact with screw or CageClamp terminals, can be expanded into contactors with 2, 4 and 5auxiliary contacts according to EN 50012 using auxiliary contact blocks.These auxiliary contact blocks cannot be combined with contactorswhich have a NC contact in the basic unit as they are coded.

LSZD0501,510 single-auxiliary contact blocks with connection optionsfrom below enable easy and clearly arranged wiring especially for theinstallation of network access junctions. These auxiliary contact blocksare offered only with screw terminals.

All the previously mentioned auxiliary contact variants can be snap-fitted onto the front of the contactor. The auxiliary contact block hasa centrally positioned release lever for disassembly.

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS

W SIZE 00

LSD0 TO LSDG CONTACTORS, 1-POLE AUXILIARY CONTACTSTerminal designations according to EN 50012.

W SIZES 0 TO 12

with 1 NO with 1 NC

LSZDD201,212,213,222 LSZDH540,531,522LSZD0501,510

contactorssize 0 to 12

LSZ0D010LSZ0D910(early make)

LSZ0D001LSZ0D901(delayed)

The terminal designations of the single-pole auxiliary contactsare comprised of sequence numbers (location identifiers) onthe contactor (1...4) and of function numbers on the auxiliarycontacts (.1/.2, .3/.4 or .5/.6, .7/.8).

The terminal designation of these individual auxiliary contactscorresponds to EN 50005 and EN 50012.


Page

16


LSD0 TO LSDG CONTACTORS, 4-POLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKSTerminal designations according to EN 50012.

W SIZES 0 TO 12

A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can be attached; the auxiliary contact blocks used can be of any version. For reasons ofsymmetry, when two 2-pole laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks are used, one block must be attached on the rightand one on the left. More auxiliary contacts are permissible with size 2 under certain conditions (please ask). For 4-pole contactors see LSR...

W SIZES 0 AND 2

A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can be attached; please note the following:• Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, there must be no more than 4 NC contacts• Ensure the symmetry of laterally mounted auxiliary contact blocksFor 4-pole contactors see LSR...

W SIZES 3 TO 12

contactorssize 0 to 12

LSZ0D131,122,113 LSZ0D140F.,122F.,131F.,104F.

The contactors themselves have no integrated auxiliary conducting path.

The auxiliary contact variants are uniform for the contactors of size 0 to 12.

One 4-pole or up to four single-pole auxiliary contact blocks(screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be snapped on. Whenthe contactors are switched on, the NC contacts are openedfirst and then the NO contacts are closed.

If the installation space is limited in depth, 2-pole auxiliary contact blocks (screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be attached laterally for use on the left or on the right (LSZ0D711,LSZ3D811).

The auxiliary contact blocks attached to the front can be dis-assembled with the help of a centrally arranged release lever;the laterally attached auxiliary contact blocks are easy to remove by pressing on the checkered surfaces.

The laterally attachable auxiliary contact blocks according toEN 50012 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary contactblocks are snapped onto the front. If single-pole auxiliary contact blocks are used in addition, the location identifiers onthe contactor must be noted.


Page

17

W CONTACT RELIABILITYHigh contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for solid-state circuits with currents ≥ 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V.

W SURGE SUPPRESSIONRC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a diode and a Zener diode) can be plugged onto all auxiliary contactors from the front for damping opening surges in the coil. The plug-in direction is determined by a codingdevice.

Note:The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are dampedagainst voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKSThe LSHD auxiliary contactors can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of mountable auxiliary contact blocks.The auxiliary contact block can easily be snapped onto the front of the contactors. The auxiliary contact block has a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly. All auxiliary contactors with 4 contacts according to EN 50011 can be extended with auxiliary contact blocks to obtain auxiliary contactors with 5 or 8 contacts in accordance with EN 50005.

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – GENERAL INFORMATIONS

Aux. contact blocks EN 50 005, 4 or 1 contacts

Aux. contactors, EN 50 011, 4 contacts

LSZDH540,531,522LSZD0501,510

4NO; 3NO + 1NC; 2NO + 2NC


Page

18

DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSDD

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50HZ LSDD0710

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* AC24V 50HZ LSDD0720



Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0713

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0723

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD0715

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD0725





Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0913

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0923

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD0915

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD0925

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50HZ LSDD1210

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC24V 50HZ LSDD1220

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC110V 50HZ LSDD1212

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC110V 50HZ LSDD1222

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD1213

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD1223

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD1215

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD1225

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSSD FOR PLC

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD071G

Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD072G

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD091G

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD092G

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD121G

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD122G

* Only auxiliary contact block type LSZDH5.. and LSZD05.. possible

LSDD.... LSSD....-PLC

W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 00

W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contact block types LSZD.... can be snapped on contac-

tors LSDD.... Contactors for PLC cannot be extended by further

auxiliary contacts. Suitable surge supressor types LSZD0001 to

LSZD0004.



SIZE 0 – TYPE LSD0

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V AC24V 50HZ LSD00930

Contactor AC3:4KW/400V DC24V LSD00935


Contactor AC3:4KW/400V AC230V 50/60HZ LSD00933

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V AC24V 50HZ LSD01230

Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V DC24V LSD01235


Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V AC230V 50/60HZ LSD01233










SIZE 0 – TYPE LSS0 FOR PLC

Contactor AC3,5,5KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0123H

Contactor AC3:7,5KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0173H

Contactor AC3:11KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0253H

* Max. 2 pcs. of auxiliary contact type LSZ0D0.. or LSZ0D9.. possible

LSD0....


W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... can be snapped on. Suitable surge

supressor types LSZD0005, LSZD0006 and LSZ00001 to LSZ00003.


Page

20

LSD3....








Contactor AC3:30KW/400V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50HZ LSD36553










Contactor AC3:45KW/400V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSD39553

LSD2....
















W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... can be snapped on. Suitable surge

supressor types LSZ20001 for AC 230V.

W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... and LSZ3D... can be snapped on. Suitable

surge supressor types LSZ20001 for AC 230V.


Page

21

LSD6115F LSD6155F LSDE305F

W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 6/10/12



Contactor AC3:55KW/400V, 2NO+2NC (with box terminals) UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6115F

Contactor AC3:75KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6155F

Contactor AC3:90KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6195F

SIZE 10 – TYPE LSDE

Contactor AC3:110KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDE225F



SIZE 12 – TYPE LSDG

Contactor AC3:200KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDG415F

Contactor AC3:250KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDG515F

LSDH....

W LSD VACUUM CONTACTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 14


SIZE 14 – TYPE LSDH

Contactor AC3:335KW/400V, 4NO+4NC UC200-240V 50HZ LSDH63G3




W SCHRACK-INFOLSD6115F fitted with box terminals

up to 70 mm2, all other types

without box terminals. Those box

terminals are deliverable on request.

Auxiliary contact and contact block

types LSZ0D... and LSZ3D... can be

snapped on. Suitable surge supres-

sor type LSZ60001.

W SCHRACK-INFOContactors cannot be extended by further auxiliary contacts. Surge supressor by means of a

varistor circuit is included in the scope of supply.


Page

22

LSWD....

W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2/3


SIZE 00 – TYPE LSWD

Reversing Assembly AC3, 3kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD0733

Reversing Assembly AC3, 4kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD0933

Reversing Assembly AC3, 5,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD1233

SIZE 0 – TYPE LSW0

Reversing Assembly AC3, 5,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSW01233


Reversing Assembly AC3, 11kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSW02533









LSY03233

W LSY WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2


SIZE 00 – TYPE LSYD

WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 7,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSYD1733

SIZE 0 – TYPE LSY0

WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 15kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSY03233

SIZE 2 – TYPE LSY2

WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 22kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSY25033

LSW0....

W SCHRACK-INFOFor higher ratings or customer assembly see components listed

on pages onwards.

W SCHRACK-INFOFor higher ratings or customer assembly see components listed on pages onwards.


Page

23


SIZE 00 – TYPE LSRD

Contactor AC1:18A/690V AC24V 50/60HZ LSRD1840

Contactor AC1:18A/690V DC24V LSRD1845



Contactor AC1:22A/690V DC24V LSRD2245


SIZE 0 – TYPE LSR0

Contactor AC1:35A/690V AC24V 50HZ LSR03540

Contactor AC1:35A/690V DC24V LSR03545

Contactor AC1:35A/690V AC230V 50/60HZ LSR03543




LSR0....

W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 00/0













LSR3....

W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 2/3

W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contacts, contact blocks and surge supressors are identical to those for contactors

LSD of same size.

W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contacts, contact blocks and surge supressors are identical to those for contactors

LSD of same size.


Page

24

CAPACITOR RATING 400V/INCLUDED AUXILIARY CONTACTS COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.

SIZE 00

12,5 kVAr/1 NO + 1 NC AC230V 50/50Hz LSKD17B3

SIZE 0

25 kVAr/1 NO AC230V 50/50Hz LSK03213

SIZE 3

50 kVAr/1 NO AC230V 50/50Hz LSK36213

LSKD17B3

W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFO• Technical data according to IEC 60 947; EN 60 947 (VDE 0660)

• The contactors are suitable for use in any climate

• They are finger-safe according to EN 50274

W TECHNICAL DATAThe LSK capacitor contactors are special version of the size 00-3 ALEA contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means ofthe mounted leading NO contacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the net-work and welding of the contactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors.The auxiliary contact block which is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in thecase of size 00 one standard NC contact and in the case of size 0 and size 3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned.Size S00 also contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can bemounted laterally on the LSK3 capacitor contactors (1 NO + 1 NC versions) type LSZ0D711. The fitting of auxiliary contacts forLSKD and LSK0 is not expandable.


12,5 kVAr/1 NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1813

12,5 kVAr/1 NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1823

20 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K2433

25 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K3233

33,3 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K5033

50 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K6233

60 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K7433

75 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K9033

90 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1133

LA3K181

W LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFO• For use in detuned or non-detuned capacitor units.

• Technical data according to EN 60 947-4-1; EN 60 947-5-1; VDE 0660

W TECHNICAL DATASpecification: The capacitor switching contactors K3-..K are suitable for switching low-inductive and lowloss capacitors in

capacitor banks (IEC70 & 831, VDE 0560) with and without reactors. Capacitor switching contactors are fitted with early

make contacts and damping resistors to reduce the value of the make current to <70 x Ie.

Operating conditions: Capacitor switching contactors are protected against contact welding for a prospective make

current of 200 x Ie. Fuse rating approx. 1,6 to 2,5 x Ie, type gL/gG.


Page

25

W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contact types LSZD05.. and LSZDH5.. can be snapped

on. Contactors for PLC cannot be extended by further auxiliary

contacts. Suitable surge supressor types LSZD0001 to LSZD0004.


AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITY SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K

AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K18, 1NC, snap on front 6A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190135

AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K24...11, 1NO+1NC, side mounted 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005 LA190134

AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K…., 1NO, snap on front 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190100

AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K…., 1NC, snap on front 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190101

W AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K


SIZE 00 – TYPE LSHD

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO AC24V 50HZ LSHD0670

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC24V LSHD0675

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0673

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC24V 50HZ LSHD0680

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC24V LSHD0685

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0683

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC24V 50HZ LSHD0690

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC24V LSHD0695

Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0693

SIZE 00 – TYPE LSHD FOR PLC

Contactor, plug with RC, AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD067N

Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD067G

Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD068N

Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD068G

Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD069N

Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD069G

* Varistors or surge supressor diodes can be plugged in

LSHD....

LA1901..

LSHD....-PLC

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE, SIZE 00


Page

26

DESCRIPTION FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0510

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0501

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD201

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO+2NC1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD212

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO+3NC1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD213

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 2NO+2NC1) DIN EN 50012 LSZDD2221) Auxiliary contact blocks for use with contactors type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NO included, for contators type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NC included use auxiliary contact blocks typeLSZDH5.. (see item below)

LSZDD213 LSZD0510

W AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD OR LSSD, SIZE 00


Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0510

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0501

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 4NO2) DIN EN 50005 LSZDH540

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 3NO+1NC2) DIN EN 50005 LSZDH531

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 2NO+2NC2) DIN EN 50005 LSZDH5222) Auxiliary contact blocks for use with contactors type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NC included, for contators type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NO included use auxiliary contact blocks typeLSZDD2.. (see item above)

LSZDH522 LSZD0510

W AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD, LSSD OR LSHD, SIZE 00

DESCRIPTION ORDER NO.

PARALLEL CONNECTOR

Parallel connector, 25mm2 for size 00, 3pol. + terminal LSZDD003

Parallel connector, 25mm2 for size 00, 4pol. + terminal LSZDD004

Parallel connector, star jumper for size 00, 3pol. (can be shortened by 1 pole) LSZDY002

FEED TERMINAL

Feed terminal, 6mm2 for size 00, 3pol. + 3 terminals LSZDD001

LSZDY002 LSZDD003 LSZDD001

W PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINAL, SIZE 00



Wiring set for reversing contactor assemblies, size 00* LSZDW001

Wiring set for WYE-Delta contactor assemblies, size 00 LSZDY001

Connection clips for two contactors, size 00* LSZDW002

* Contains two connection clips and one mechanical interlock link

LSZDW002

W WIRING SETS*, MECHANICAL INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION CLIPS, SIZE 00


WYE-Delta timer, 20s (timedelay -20s) 24/240VAC 24 VDC 50/60Hz LSZD0101

WYE-Delta timer, 60s (timedelay -60s) 24/240VAC 24 VDC 50/60Hz LSZD0102

LSZD0102

W WYE-DELTA TIMERS

DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE ORDER NO.

Connection link for contactor size 00 and

motor protection switch, size 00 AC-DC operated LSZDD005

Connection link for contactor size 00 and

motor protection switch, size 0 AC-DC operated LSZDD006

LSZDD005

W CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES, SIZE 00

W SCHRACK-INFOBy using the interlock link, the overall width of the e.g. reversing assembly is not increased

(0 mm clearance between the contactors).

W SCHRACK-INFOTimers have a fixed dead intervall of 50 ms (between Wye- and Delta-state).


Page

28


Solder pin adapter for size 00 LSZDD002

LSZDD002

W SOLDER PIN ADAPTER, SIZE 00


Varistor for size 00 AC24-48V; DC24-70V LSZD0001

Varistor for size 00 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZD0002

Surge supressor for size 00 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZD0003

Surge supressor diode for size 00 DC12-250V LSZD0004

LSZD0004

W SURGE SUPRESSORS (PLUG IN TYPE), SIZE 00


Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NC DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D001

Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NO DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D010

Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NC-delayed DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D901

Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NO-early make DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D910

LSZ0D001 LSZ0D010

W AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12


Page

29


Auxiliary Contact, sidemounted for size 0-12, 1NO+1NC, first position DIN EN 50012 LSZ0D711

Auxiliary Contact, sidemounted for size 3-12, 1NO+1NC, second position DIN EN 50012 LSZ3D811

LSZ0D711

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SIDE MOUNTED), SIZE 0-12


Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 1NO+3NC DIN EN 50012 LSZ0D113



Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 4NO DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D140F

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 3NO+1NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D131F

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 2NO+2NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D122F

Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 4NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D104F

LSZ0D122

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12


Mechanical interlock for contactors size 0-3 (including 2NC auxiliary contacts) LSZ0W002

Mechanical interlock for contactors size 6-12 LSZ6W001

LSZ0W002

W MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS, SIZE 0-12


Page

30


Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 0 LSZ0W001

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 2, including connection clips LSZ2W001

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 3, including connection clips LSZ3W001

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 6 LSZ6W002

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 10 LSZEW001

Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 12 LSZGW001

W WIRING SETS FOR REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZE 0-12


Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 0, including mech.interlock and connection clips LSZ0Y001

Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-0 LSZ2Y004

Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-2 LSZ2Y003

Mountingplate for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-0 LSZ2Y001

Mountingplate for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-2 LSZ2Y002

W WIRING SETS FOR YD-ASSEMBLIES AND YD-ACCESSORIES, SIZE 0-3


Connection link for contactor size 0 and BES0 AC operating assemblies LSZ0D002

Connection link for contactor size 0 and BES0 DC operating assemblies LSZ0D004





LSZ0D002 LSZ2D004

W CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES, SIZE 0-3


Page

31

LSZ0Y002 LSZ6Y003


Surge supressor, diode assembly for size 0, top mounted DC24V LSZD0005

Surge supressor, diode assembly for size 0, bottom mounted DC24V (marked with “+” and “–“) LSZD0006

Varistor for size 0 AC24-48V; DC24-70V LSZ00001

Varistor for size 0 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ00002

Surge supressor, RC for size 0 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ00003

Surge supressor, RC for size 2-3 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ20001

Surge supressor, RC for size 6-12 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ60001

LSZ00002

W SURGE SUPRESSORS, SIZE 0-12


PARALLEL CONNECTOR

Parallel connector, 35mm2 for size 0, 3pol. + terminal LSZ0D003

Parallel connector, star jumper for size 0, 3pol.* LSZ0Y002

Parallel connector; 95mm2 for size 2, 3pol.+terminal LSZ2D003



Parallel connector, star jumper for size 6, 3pol. (with bore diameter 10,5mm) LSZ6Y003

Parallel connector, star jumper for size 10, 12, 3pol. (with bore diameter 12,5mm) LSZEY003

FEED TERMINALS

Feed terminal, 25mm2 for size 0, 3pol. + 3 terminals BEZ00116

Feed terminal, 50mm2 for size 2, 3pol. + 3 terminals BEZ00216

Feed terminal, 95mm2 for size 3, 1pol. + terminal LSZ3D001

LSZ2D003

W PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINALS, SIZE 0-12

W SCHRACK-INFOStar jumper size 0-3 can be reduced by 1 pole*. For touch-protection of parallel connectors size 6 use LSZ6D002, for size

10 and size 12 use LSZED002.

W SCHRACK-INFOUp to size 3, these devices can be snapped in either at the top (assemblies with overload

relays) or at the bottom (assemblies with MPS) of the contactor. Sizes 6-12: snapping in is

only possible at the top of contactor.

BEZ00116


Page

32


Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 0 to 0 (contactors without interlock) LSZ0W003

Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 0 to 0 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ0W004

Connection clip, for contactors 4pole, size 2 to 2 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ2W002

Connection clip, for contactors 4pole, size 3 to 3 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ3W002

Connection clip, for contactors 3pole, size 2/3/6 to 2/3/6 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ2W003

Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 2/3 (contactors without interlock) LSZ2D001

LSZ2W003 LSZ2D001

W CONNECTION CLIPS FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0-3


Mechanical latching block for size 0-2, remains "ON" if voltage fails 24VACDC LSZ00113

LSZ00113

W MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK, SIZE 0-2


Terminal Cover for size 2* (additional cover, to be fitted on the box terminals) LSZ2D002

Terminal Cover for size 3* (additional cover, to be fitted on the box terminals) LSZ3D002

Terminal Cover for size 6* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (38 mm) LSZ6D001

Terminal Cover - short version for size 6* for contactor assemblies (100 mm) LSZ6D002

Terminal Cover for size 10*/12* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (120 mm) LSZED001

Terminal Cover - short version for size 10*/12* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (42 mm) LSZED002

Terminal Cover for size 14* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection LSZHD001

* Order 2 pcs. for one complete contactor, order 1 pc. just for one side (up side or bottom side) of contactor

LSZ6D001 LSZ6D002

W TERMINAL COVERS, SIZE 2-14

W SCHRACK-INFO2 pieces of clips are necessary for 1 contactor-assembly

(2 contactors).

W SCHRACK-INFOContactors fitted with this latching block will remain “ON” in case of control-voltage failure

until the latching block is resetted by a 24 VAC DC impuls.

W SCHRACK-INFOAdditional covers for contactors with box terminals size 6-12

on request.

Contactor Type LSS, LSDSize 00 ... 12

Rated data of the auxiliary contactsAcc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the auxiliary contact blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S121)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690For LSZ..... laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks V max. 500Continuous thermal current Ith = A 10Rated operational current Ie/AC-12AC load Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6

110 V A 6125 V A 6220 V A 6230 V A 6380 V A 3400 V A 3500 V A 2

660 V2) A 1690 V2) A 1

DC load Rated operational current Ie/DC-12for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 10

60 V A 6110 V A 3125 V A 2220 V A 1440 V A 0.3

600 V2) A 0.15Rated operational current Ie/DC-13for rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101)

60 V A 2110 V A 1125 V A 0.9220 V A 0.3440 V A 0,14

600 V2) A 0,1• Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults < 10-8 i.e. <1 fault per 100 million operating cycles

acc. to EN 60947-5-4Endurance of the auxiliary contacts

It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current.The characteristic curves apply to• Integrated auxiliary contacts for LSS/LSD• LSZ..... auxiliary contact blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S12.

1) Attachable auxiliary contact blocks for size S00 and laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks for S0 to S12: 6 A.

2) Up to 500 V switching capacity for laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Legend:Ia = Breaking current Ie = Rated operational current

Page

33

W LSS, LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW

• ALEA controls are climate-proof and are suitable and tested for use worldwide.• If the devices are used in ambient conditions which deviate from common industrial conditions (EN60721-3-3 “Stationary

Use, Weather-Protected“), the manufacturer must be consulted about possible restrictions with regard to the reliability andendurance of the device and possible protective measures.

Endurance of the main contacts

The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the contactors when switchingresistive and inductive AC loads (AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current andrated operational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switchedrandomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization category AC-4 (breaking six timesthe rated operational current) and is intended for a contact endurance of at least 200 000operating cycles.If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational current Ie/AC-4 can be increased.If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. normal switching (breaking the ratedoperational current according to utilization category AC-3) in combination with intermittentinching (breaking several times the rated operational current according to utilizationcategory AC-4), the contact endurance can be calculated approximately from the followingequation:

Characters in the equation:X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cyclesA Contact endurance for normal operation (Ia = Ie) in operating cyclesB Contact endurance for inching (Ia = multiple of Ie) in operating cyclesC Inching operations as a percentage of total switching operations

Diagram legend:PN = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 VIa = Breaking currentIe = Rated operational current



Page

34Size 00

Size 0

Contactor type LSSD07, LSDD073 kW

Contactor type LSSD09, LSSD12,LSDD09, LSDD124 kW 5,5 kW

Contactor type –LSD009

LSS012LSD012

LSS017LSD017

LSS025LSD025


Page

35

Endurance of the main contacts

Size 2

Diagram legend:PN = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 VIa = Breaking currentIe = Rated operational current

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism comply with the requirements for operation in industrial installations.• Interference immunity

- Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kW- Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kW- Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kW- Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m

• Emitted interference - Limited value class A according to EN 55011

Note: In connection with converters, the control cables should be installed seperatly from the load cables to the converter.

W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW

Size 3

Sizes 6–12

Contactor type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250

Contactor LSD611type

LSD619LSD615 LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30 LSDG41 LSDG51

Contactor type LSD365 LSD380 LSD395

Contactor Type LSSD, LSDDSize 00

General dataPermissible mounting position AC and DC operationThe contactors are designed foroperation on a vertical mounting surface.

Upright mounting position: AC operation

Special version required.DC operation Standard version

Mechanical endurance Basic unit Operating 30 millioncycles

Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 10 millioncontact blockSolid-state compatible auxiliary 5 millioncontact block

Electrical endurance 1)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 400acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix NAmbient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60

During storage °C -55 ... +80Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safeShock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10

DC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10

DC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10Conductor cross-sections 2)

Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relaysFor short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays seeProtection Equipment: Overload RelaysFor short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders,Motor Starters and Soft Starters: -> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders.

Main circuit• Fuse links gL/gG LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED

- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 35EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 20

Weld-free3) A 10• Miniature circuit breakers (up to 230 V) with C characteristic A 10

Short-circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1"Auxiliary circuit• Fuse links gL/gG A 10

DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection Ik ≥ 1 kA)• Miniature circuit breakers up to 230 V with C characteristic A 6

Short-circuit current Ik < 400 A

1) See first two pages of chapter Technical Specifications “Endurance of the main contacts”.2) See “Conductor cross-sections” pages onward.3) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.



Page

36� � � � � � � � � ��

Contactor Type LSSD, LSDDSize 00

ControlMagnetic coil operating range • AC operation 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

• DC operation up to 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

up to 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

Power consumption of the magnetic coils coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)AC operation, 50/60 HzStandard version • Closing VA 27/24.3

• P.f. 0.8/0.75• Closed VA 4.4/3.4• P.f. 0.27/0.27

AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 26.4• P.f. for closing 0.81• Closed VA 4.7• P.f. for closed 0.26

AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 31.7• P.f. for closing 0.77• Closed VA 5.1• P.f. for closed 0.27

DC operation Closing = Closed W 3.3Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)

• AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/Us)

• DC operation < 10 mA x (24 V/Us)Operating times1)

Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time• AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35

at 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us Opening delay ms 4 ... 30

• DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us Opening delay ms 7 ... 10

• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15Operating times for 1.0 x Us

1)

• AC operation Closing delay ms 10 ... 25Opening delay ms 5 ... 30

• DC operation Closing delay ms 30 ... 50Opening delay ms 7 ... 9

1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactorcoils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times,varistor +2 to 5 ms).



Page

37

1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account).2) According to IEC 60947-4-1. For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays.

Contactor Type LSSD07, LSDD07 LSSD09, LSDD09 LSSD12, LSDD12Size 00 00 00

Main circuitAC capacityUtilization category AC-1Switching resistive loads

Rated operational current Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 22at 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 20

Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 6.3 7.5 7.5P.f.= 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 11 13 13

500 V kW 13.8 17 17690 V kW 19 22 22

Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 2.5for loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 2.5Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 7 9 12

440 V A 7 9 11500 V A 5 6.5 9690 V A 4 5.2 6.3

Rated power for slipring or squirrelcage at 230 V kW 2.2 3 3motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 3 4 5.5

500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5

Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 56 72 96



Page

38


Main circuitAC capacityPower loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors up to 400 V kW 3 4 4with 50 Hz and 60 Hz

• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000operating cycles:- rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1

690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3

• - rated power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1motors 400 V kW 1.15 2 2with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 500 V kW 1.45 2 2

690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5Utilization category AC-5aSwitching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballastPer main current path at 230 V• Uncorrected,

rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 54 59 59L 36 W/0.43 A Units 46 51 51L 58 W/0.67 A Units 29 32 32L 80 W/0.79 A Units 25 27 27

• DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 90 (� 2 x 90 lamps) 100 (� 2 x 100 lamps) 100 (� 2 x 100 lamps)L 36 W/0.42 A Units 47 (� 2 x 47 lamps) 52 (� 2 x 52 lamps) 52 (� 2 x 52 lamps)L 58 W/0.63 A Units 31 (� 2 x 31 lamps) 34 (� 2 x 34 lamps) 34 (� 2 x 34 lamps)L 80 W/0.87 A Units 22 (� 2 x 22 lamps) 25 (� 2 x 25 lamps) 25 (� 2 x 25 lamps)

Switching gas discharge lamps with correctionPer main current path at 230 V• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast,

rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 17 22 22

L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 16 22 22L 58 W/7.0 µF/0.32 A Units 10 14 14L 80 W/7.0 µF/0.49 A Units 6 9 9

• With solid-state ballast1) single lampL 18 W/6.8 µF/0.10 A Units 49 63 63L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 27 35 35L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 16 23 23L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 11 14 14

• With solid-state ballast1) two-lampL 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 27 (� 2 x 27 lamps) 35 (� 2 x 35 lamps) 35 (� 2 x 35 lamps)L 36 W/10 µF/0.35 A Units 14 (� 2 x 14 lamps) 18 (� 2 x 18 lamps) 18 (� 2 x 18 lamps)L 58 W/22 µF/0.52 A Units 9 (� 2 x 9 lamps) 12 (� 2 x 12 lamps) 12 (� 2 x 12 lamps)L 80 W/22 µF/0.86 A Units 5 (� 2 x 5 lamps) 7 (� 2 x 7 lamps) 7 (� 2 x 7 lamps)

Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.3 1.7 1.7Per main current path at 230/220 VUtilization category AC-6aswitching AC transformersRated operational current Ie

• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 3.6 5.1 7.2• For inrush current n = 30 up to 400 V A 2.4 3.3 5.1

Rated power P• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 1.4 2 2.9

400 V kVA 2.5 3.5 5500 V kVA 3.3 4.6 6.2690 V kVA 4.3 6 8.6

• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 1 1.3 2400 V kVA 1.6 2.3 3.5500 V kVA 2.2 3.1 4.6690 V kVA 2.9 4 6

For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:Px = Pn 30 · 30/x

1) Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also possible.


Page

39



Main circuitDC capacityUtilization category DC-1Switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 15 20

60 V A 15 20110 V A 1.5 2.1220 V A 0.6 0.8440 V A 0.42 0.6600 V A 0.42 0.6

• 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 15 2060 V A 15 20

110 V A 8.4 12

220 V A 1.2 1.6440 V A 1.6 0.8600 V A 0.5 0.7


110 V A 15 20

220 V A 15 20440 V A 0.9 1.3600 V A 0.7 1

Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 15 20

60 V A 0.35 0.5110 V A 0.1 0.15220 V A – –440 V A – –600 V A – –

• 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 15 2060 V A 3.5 5

110 V A 0.25 0.35220 V A – –440 V A – –600 V A – –


110 V A 15 20220 V A 1.2 1.5440 V A 0.14 0.2600 V A 0.14 0.2

Switching frequencySwitching frequency z in operating cycles/hour• Contactors without overload relay No-load switching frequency AC h-1 10000

No-load switching frequency DC h-1 10000Dependence of the switching Rated operationfrequency z ’ on the operational current AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000I ’ and operational voltage U’: AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750z’ = z . (I e/I ’) . (400 V/U’)1.5 . 1/h AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 750

AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15

Conductor cross-sections• Screw terminals Main and auxiliary conductors: Screw terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4)For standard screwdriver size 2 and • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)

Pozidriv 2 • Solid or stranded, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12• AWG cables• Terminal screw M3

- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)• Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Main and auxiliary conductors; Cage Clamp terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) coil connections:

• Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)

solid or stranded

1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does notapply.


Page

40


Contactor Type – LSS012 LSS017 LSS025LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025

Size 0 0 0 0General data

Permissible mounting positionThe contactors are designed for AC and DC operationoperation on a vertical mountingsurface.


Standard versionDC operation Special version required

Mechanical endurance Basic unit Operating 10 millioncycles

Basic unit with snap-on 10 millionauxiliary contact block


Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 400(acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N)Mirror contacts• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC LSD0...., LSS0.... Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F

contact that cannot be closed (removable auxiliary contact block)simultaneously with a NO main contact.

LSD0...., LSS0.... Acc. to SUVA requirements on request(permanent auxiliary contact block)

Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60During storage °C -55 ... +80

Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP20Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safeShock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.2/5 and 4.9/10

DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 7.5/10

Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.5/5 and 7.8/10DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 10/10

Conductor cross-sections 2)

Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relaysMain circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with thermal overload relays see Protection• Fuse links gL/gG Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays• LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders• - acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 25 35

EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2"Weld-free3) A 10 16

• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 25 32(short-circuit current 3 kA, type of coordination "1")

Auxiliary circuit• Fuse links gL/gG A 10

DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)

• Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)


� � � � � � � � � ��


Page

41



Contactor Type LSS0, LSD0Size 0

ControlMagnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x UsPower consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)

AC operation, 50 Hz, • Closing VA 61standard version • P.f. 0.82

• Closed VA 7.8• P.f. 0.24

AC operation, 50/60 Hz, • Closing VA 64/63standard version • P.f. 0.72/0.74

• Closed VA 8.4/6.8• P.f. 0.24/0.28

AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 61• P.f. 0.82• Closed VA 7.8• P.f. 0.24

AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 69• P.f. 0.76• Closed VA 7.5• P.f. 0.28

DC operation Closing = Closed W 5.4Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)

• AC operation mA < 6 mA x (230 V/Us)• DC operation mA < 16 mA x (24 V/Us)

Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)

Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time


• DC operation Closing delay ms 50 ... 170Opening delay ms 13.5 ... 15.5

• Arcing time ms 10Operating times for 1.0 x Us

1)


• DC operation Closing delay ms 55 ... 85Opening delay ms 14 ... 15.5

1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact areincreased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).


Size 0 0 0 0Main circuit

AC capacityUtilization category AC-1Switching resistive loads

Rated operational current Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 40at 60 °C up to 690 V A 35

Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 13.3P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 23

500 V kW 29690 V kW 40

Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm² 10loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 10Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25440 V A 9 12 17 22500 V A 6.5 12 17 18690 V A 5.2 9 13 13

Rated power for slipring or squirrelcage at 110 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5

400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11500 V kW 4.5 7.5 10 11

660 V / 690 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 80 110 150 200Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6


Page

42


1) For Ie/AC-1 = 35 A (60 °C) and the corresponding minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm2.2) Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also possible.



AC capacityUtilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)

Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with at 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 7.550 Hz and 60 Hz

• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 operating cycles:

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with at 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.250 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 1.1 1.5 2 2.5

400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7

Utilization category AC-5aSwitching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballastPer main current path at 230 V1)

Rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp

Uncorrected L 18 W/0.37 A Units 108L 36 W/0.43 A Units 93L 58 W/0.67 A Units 59L 80 W/0.79 A Units 50

DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 181 (� 2 x 181 lamps)L 36 W/0.42 A Units 95 (� 2 x 95 lamps)L 58 W/0.63 A Units 63 (� 2 x 63 lamps)L 80 W/0.87 A Units 45 (� 2 x 45 lamps)

Switching gas discharge lamps with correctionPer main current path at 230 V

Rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp

• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 37 41 61L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 30 30 51L 58 W/7.0 µF/0.32 A Units 20 20 33L 80 W/7.0 µF/0.49 A Units 13 13 22

• With solid-state ballast2) single lamp L 18 W/6.8 µF/0.10 A Units 105 119 175L 36 W/6.8 µF/0.18 A Units 58 66 97L 58 W/10 µF/0.29 A Units 36 41 60L 80 W/10 µF/0.43 A Units 24 27 40

• With solid-state ballast2) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 58 (� 2 x 58 lamps) 66 (� 2 x 66 l.) 97 (� 2 x 97 l.)L 36 W/10 µF/0.35 A Units 30 (� 2 x 30 lamps) 34 (� 2 x 34 l.) 50 (� 2 x 50 l.)L 58 W/22 µF/0.52 A Units 20 (� 2 x 20 lamps) 22 (� 2 x 22 l.) 33 (� 2 x 33 l.)L 80 W/22 µF/0.86 A Units 12 (� 2 x 12 lamps) 13 (� 2 x 13 l.) 20 (� 2 x 20 l.)

Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lampsPer main current path at 230/220 V kW 2.8 3.2 4.7Utilization category AC-6aswitching AC transformers

Rated operational current Ie• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 11.4 20.2• For inrush current n = 30 up to 400 V A 7.6 13.5

Rating P

• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 4.5 8400 V kVA 7.9 13.9500 V kVA 9.9 15.5690 V kVA 13.6 15.5

• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 3 5.4400 V kVA 5.2 9.3500 V kVA 6.6 11.7690 V kVA 9.1 15.5

For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:Px = Pn30

. 30/x

Utilization category AC-6b,switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 5.8 10.8

Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 2.5 4banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 4 7.5of 6 µH between capacitors connected in 500 V kvar 4 7.5parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 4 7.5


Page

43




DC capacityUtilization category DC-1Switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1ms)

Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)

• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 3560 V A 20

110 V A 4.5

220 V A 1440 V A 0.4600 V A 0.25

• 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 3560 V A 35

110 V A 35

220 V A 5440 V A 1600 V A 0.8


110 V A 35

220 V A 35440 V A 2.9600 V A 1.4

Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)


• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 2060 V A 5

110 V A 2.5

220 V A 1440 V A 0.09600 V A 0.06


110 V A 15

220 V A 3440 V A 0.27600 V A 0.16


110 V A 35

220 V A 10440 V A 0.6600 V A 0.6

Switching frequencySwitching frequency z in operating cycles/hour• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching h-1 5000

frequency ACDependence of the switching frequency z’ No-load switching h-1 1500on the operational current I’ and operational frequency DCvoltage U’:z’ = z . (Ie/I’) . (400 V/U’)1.5 . 1/h AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000

AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 250

• Contactors with Thermal overload relays (mean value) h-1 15


Page

44


Contactor Type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250Size 2 2 2

General dataPermissible mounting position AC and DC operationThe contactors are designed foroperation on a vertical mountingsurface.

For DC operation and 22.5 ° inclination towards the front,operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us


Special version required.DC operation –

Mechanical endurance Basic units Operating 10 millioncycles

Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 10 millioncontact block


Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 400acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix NPermissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60

During storage °C -55 ... +80Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00),

AC coil assembly IP40,DC coil assembly IP30

Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 finger-safeShock resistance

• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10Conductor cross-sections 3)

2) See first two pages of chapter Technical Specifications “Endurance of the main contacts”.3) See “Conductor cross-sections” pages onward.


Size 0 0 0 0Conductor cross-sections

Screw terminals Main conductors Screw terminals

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Conductor cross-section• Solid mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 1 x 10• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)

• AWG cables, solid AWG 2 x (16 ... 12)• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (14 ... 10)• AWG cables, stranded AWG 1 x 8• Terminal screws M4 (Pozidriv size 2)

- tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 (18 ... 22 lb.in)Auxiliary conductors

Conductor cross-section• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)

• Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12• Terminal screws M3

- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors Cage Clamp terminals

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)

1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point,both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used,this restriction does not apply.

� � � � � � � � � ��


Page

45



Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relaysFor short-circuit protection for contactors with thermal overload relays seeprotection equipment: Thermal overload relaysFor short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see protection equipment: Motor protection switches

Main circuitFuse links, gL/gGLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED

Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 125 125 160EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 63 63 80

Weld-free1) A 16 16 50Auxiliary circuit

• Fuse links gL/gG A 10DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)

• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current Ik ≤ 400 A) A 10Control

Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)

AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version • Closing VA 104 145• P.f. 0.78 0.79• Closed VA 9.7 12.5• P.f. 0.42 0.36

AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version • Closing VA 127/113 170/155• P.f. 0.73/0.69 0.76/0.72• Closed VA 11.3/9.5 15/11.8• P.f. 0.41/0.42 0.35/0.38

AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 108 150• P.f. 0.76 0.77• Closed VA 9.6 12.5• P.f. 0.42 0.35

AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 120 166• P.f. 0.7 0.71• Closed VA 10.1 12.6• P.f. 0.42 0.37

DC operation Closing = Closed W 13.3 13.3Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)

• AC operation mA <12 mA x (230 V/Us) <18 mA x (230 V/Us)• DC operation mA <38 mA x (24 V/Us) <38 mA x (24 V/Us)


(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)

AC operation • Closing delay ms 11 ... 30 10 ... 24• Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10

DC operation • Closing delay ms 50 ... 95 60 ... 100• Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25

Arcing time ms 10 10

Operating times for 1.0 x Us2

AC operation • Closing delay ms 13 ... 22 12 ... 20• Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10

DC operation • Closing delay ms 60 ... 75 70 ... 85• Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25

1) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.2) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly:

2 to 6 times).


Page

46




Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 50 60 60at 60 °C up to 690 V A 45 55 55

Rated power for AC loads1) 230 V kW 18 22 22P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 31 38 38

500 V kW 39 46 46690 V kW 54 66 66

Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm² 16 16 16loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 10 16 16Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 32 40 50

690 V A 20 24 24

Rated power for slipring 230 V kW 7.5 11 15or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 15 18.5 22at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 18.5 22 30

690 V kW 18.5 22 22Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 320 400 400Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 1.8 2.6 5Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)

Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 29 35 41

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 15 18.5 22with 50 Hz and 60 Hz


Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 15.6 18.5 24690 V A 15.6 18.5 24

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors 230 V kW 4.7 5.4 7.3with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6

500 V kW 9.8 11.8 15.8690 V kW 13 15.5 21.8

Utilization category AC-5aSwitching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballastPer main current path at 230 V

• Uncorrected,rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 135 162 162

L 36 W/0.43 A Units 116 139 139L 58 W/0.67 A Units 74 89 89L 80 W/0.79 A Units 63 75 75

• DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 227 (� 2 x 227 lamps) 272 (� 2 x 272 lamps) 272 (� 2 x 272 lamps)L 36 W/0.42 A Units 119 (� 2 x 119 lamps) 142 (� 2 x 142 lamps) 142 (� 2 x 142 lamps)L 58 W/0.63 A Units 79 (� 2 x 79 lamps) 95 (� 2 x 95 lamps) 95 (� 2 x 95 lamps)L 80 W/0.87 A Units 57 (� 2 x 57 lamps) 68 (� 2 x 68 lamps) 68 (� 2 x 68 lamps)


• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast,rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp

L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 78 98 123L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 78 98 123

L 58 W/7 µF/0.32 A Units 50 63 79L 80 W/7 µF/0.49 A Units 50 63 73


• With solid-state ballast3) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 124 (� 2 x 124 lamps) 155 (� 2 x 155 lamps) 194 (� 2 x 194 lamps)L 36 W/10 µF/0.35 A Units 64 (� 2 x 64 lamps) 80 (� 2 x 80 lamps) 100 (� 2 x 100 lamps)L 58 W/22 µF/0.52 A Units 43 (� 2 x 43 lamps) 54 (� 2 x 54 lamps) 67 (� 2 x 67 lamps)L 80 W/22 µF/0.86 A Units 26 (� 2 x 26 lamps) 32 (� 2 x 32 lamps) 40 (� 2 x 40 lamps)

1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account).2) According to IEC 60947-4-1. For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays.3) Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also possible.


Page

47



Main circuitAC capacityUtilization category AC-5b kW 6.0 7.6 9.5Switching incandescent lampsPer main current path at 230/220 VUtilization category AC-6aswitching AC transformers

Rated operational current Ie• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 31 36.5 43.2• For inrush current n = 30 up to 400 V A 20.7 24.3 28.8

Rating PFor inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 12.3 14.5 17.2

400 V kVA 21.5 25.3 29.9500 V kVA 26.8 31.6 37.4690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7

For inrush current n = 30 230 V kVA 8.2 9.7 11.5400 V kVA 14.3 16.8 20500 V kVA 17.9 21 24.9690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7

For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows.Px = Pn30

. 30/xUtilization category AC-6bSwitching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitorsAmbient temperature 40 °C

Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 29 36 36

Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 12 15 15banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 20 25 25of 20 µH between capacitors connected 525 V kvar 25 33 33in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 20 25 25DC capacityUtilization category DC-1Switching resistive loads (L/R < 1ms)


• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 45 55 5560 V A 20 23 23

110 V A 4.5 4.5 4.5

220 V A 1 1 1440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.4600 V A 0.25 0.25 0.25

• 2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 45 55 5560 V A 45 45 45

110 V A 25 25 25

220 V A 5 5 5440 V A 1 1 1600 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8


110 V A 45 55 55

220 V A 45 45 45440 V A 2.9 2.9 2.9600 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4

Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15ms)



110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5

220 V A 1 1 1440 V A 0.1 0.1 0.1600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06


110 V A 25 25 25

220 V A 5 5 5440 V A 0.27 0.27 0.27600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16


110 V A 45 55 55

220 V A 25 25 25440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35


Page

48



Switching frequencySwitching frequency z in operating cycles/hour

• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000No-load switching frequency DC h-1 1500 1500 1500

Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1200 1200 1000z’ on the operational current I’ AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750 600 400and operational voltage U’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 800z’ = z . (Ie/I’) . (400 V/U’)1.5 . 1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250 300 300

• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 15 15

Contactor Type LSD2..Size 2

Conductor cross-sectionsScrew terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) with box terminalFront clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25

• Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35• Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8

(number x width x thickness)• AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2

solid or stranded

Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 0.75 ... 25

• Stranded mm² 0.75 ... 35• Solid mm² 0.75 ... 16• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8

(number x width x thickness)• AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2

solid or stranded

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)

• Stranded mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 25)• Solid mm² 2 x (0.75 ... 16)• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)

(number x width x thickness)• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (18 ... 2)

solid or stranded

• Terminal screw M6 (Pozidriv size 2)- tightening torque Nm 3 ... 4.5 (27 ... 40 lb.in)

Auxiliary conductors:

• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)

• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12

• Terminal screw M3- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)

Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)

• Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• AWG cables, 2 x (24 ... 14)

solid or stranded

1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does notapply.


Page

49



General dataPermissible mounting position AC and DC operationThe contactors are designed foroperation on a vertical mountingsurface.

For DC operation and 22.5 ° inclination towards the front,operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us


Special version required.DC operation –

Mechanical endurance Basic units Operating 10 millioncycles

Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 10 millioncontact block


Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 1000Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 690acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix NPermissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60

During storage °C -55 ... +80Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00),

AC coil assembly IP40,DC coil assembly IP30

Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 finger-safeShock resistance

• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10Conductor cross-sections 2)

Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relaysFor short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays seeProtection Equipment: Overload RelaysFor short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see load feeders

Main circuit

• Fuse links gL/gGLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 250 250

EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 125 160Weld-free3) A 63 100

Auxiliary circuit

• Fuse links gL/gG A 10DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)

• Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current Ik < 400 A) A 10


� � � � � � � � � ��


Page

50



ControlMagnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)

AC operation, 50 Hz, • Closing VA 218 270standard version • P.f. 0.61 0.68

• Closed VA 21 22• P.f. 0.26 0.27

AC operation, 50/60 Hz, • Closing VA 247/211 298/274standard version • P.f. 0.62/0.57 0.7/0.62

• Closed VA 25/18 27/20• P.f. 0.27/0.3 0.29/0.31

AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 218 270• P.f. 0.61 0.68• Closed VA 21 22• P.f. 0.26 0.27

AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada • Closing VA 232 300• P.f. 0.55 0.52• Closed VA 20 21• P.f. 0.28 0.29

DC operation Closing = Closed W 15 15Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)

• AC operation < 25 mA x (230 V/Us)• DC operation < 43 mA x (24 V/Us)


Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time

• AC operation Closing delay ms 16 ... 57 17 ... 90Opening delay ms 10 ... 19 10 ... 25

• DC operation Closing delay ms 90 ... 230 90 ... 230Opening delay ms 14 ... 20 14 ... 20

• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15Operating times for 1.0 x Us

1)

• AC operation Closing delay ms 18 ... 34 18 ... 30Opening delay ms 11 ... 18 11 ... 23

• DC operation Closing delay ms 100 ... 120 100 ... 120Opening delay ms 16 ... 20 16 ... 20


Rated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 100 120 1201000 V A 50 60 70

at 60 °C up to 690 V A 90 100 1001000 V A 40 50 60

Rated output of AC loads2) at 230 V kW 34 38 38P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 59 66 66

500 V kW 74 82 82690 V kW 102 114 114

1000 V kW 66 82 98

Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm² 35 50 50loads with IIe At 60 °C mm² 35 35 35Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3

Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 65 80 95690 V A 47 58 58

1000 V A 25 30 30

Rated power for slipring at 230 V kW 18.5 22 22or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 30 37 45at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 37 45 55

690 V kW 45 55 551000 V kW 30 37 37

Thermal load capacity 10 s current3) A 600 760 760Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 W 4.6 7.7 10.8

1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).



Page

51



Main circuitAC capacityUtilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)

Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 55 66 80

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 30 37 45with 50 Hz and 60 Hz


- rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 28 34 42690 V A 28 34 42

1000 V A 20 23 23

- rated power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 8.7 10.4 12motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 15.1 17.9 22

500 V kW 18.4 22.4 27690 V kW 25.4 30.9 38

1000 V A 22 30 30Utilization category AC-5aSwitching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballastPer main current path at 230 V

• Uncorrected,rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 270 324

L 36 W/0.43 A Units 232 279L 58 W/0.67 A Units 149 179L 80 W/0.79 A Units 126 151

• DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.21 A Units 454 (� 2 x 454 lamps) 545 (� 2 x 545 lamps)L 36 W/0.42 A Units 238 (� 2 x 238 lamps) 285 (� 2 x 285 lamps)L 58 W/0.63 A Units 158 (� 2 x 158 lamps) 190 (� 2 x 190 lamps)L 80 W/0.87 A Units 114 (� 2 x 114 lamps) 137 (� 2 x 137 lamps)


• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast,rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp

L 18 W/4.5 µF/0.11 A Units 160 197 234L 36 W/4.5 µF/0.21 A Units 160 197 234

L 58 W/7 µF/0.32 A Units 103 127 150L 80 W/7 µF/0.49 A Units 103 126 146


• With solid-state ballast1) two-lamp L 18 W/10 µF/0.18 A Units 253 (� 2 x 253 lamps) 311 (� 2 x 311 lamps) 369 (� 2 x 369 lamps)L 36 W/10 µF/0.35 A Units 130 (� 2 x 130 lamps) 160 (� 2 x 160 lamps) 190 (� 2 x 190 lamps)L 58 W/22 µF/0.52 A Units 88 (� 2 x 88 lamps) 108 (� 2 x 108 lamps) 128 (� 2 x 128 lamps)L 80 W/22 µF/0.86 A Units 52 (� 2 x 52 lamps) 65 (� 2 x 65 lamps) 77 (� 2 x 77 lamps)

Utilization category AC-5bSwitching incandescent lampsPer main current path at 230/220 V kW 12.3 15.2 18.1

1) Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also possible.


Page

52



Main circuitAC capacityUtilization category AC-6aswitching AC transformersRated operational current Ie (60 °C)

• For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 63.5 80 84.4up to 690 V A 47 58 58

• For inrush current n = 30 up to 400 V A 42.3 56.3 56.3up to 690 V A 42.3 56.3 56.3

Rating P

• For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 25.3 31.9 33.6

400 V kVA 43.9 55.4 58500 V kVA 54.9 69.3 73.1690 V kVA 56.2 69.3 69.3

• For inrush current n = 30 230 V kV 16.8 22.4 22.4400 V kVA 29.3 39 39500 V kVA 36.6 48.7 48.7690 V kVA 50.3 67.3 67.3

For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows.Px = Pn30

. 30/xUtilization category AC-6bSwitching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors

Rated operational currents Ie (60 °C) up to 400 V A 57 72

Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 24 29banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 40 50of 6 µH between capacitors connected 525 V kvar 50 65in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 40 50DC capacityUtilization category DC-1Switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)

Rated operational current Ie (60 °C)


110 V A 4.5 9 9

220 V A 1 2 2440 V A 0.4 0.6 0.6600 V A 0.26 0.4 0.4


110 V A 90 100 100

220 V A 5 10 10440 V A 1 1.8 1.8600 V A 0.8 1 1


110 V A 90 100 100

220 V A 70 80 80440 V A 2.9 1.8 4.5600 V A 1.4 1 2.6

Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)

Rated operational current Ie (60 °C)

• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 40 40 4060 V A 6 6.5 6.5

110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5

220 V A 1 1 1440 V A 0.15 0.15 0.15600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06


110 V A 90 100 100

220 V A 7 7 7440 V A 0.42 0.42 0.42600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16


110 V A 90 100 100

220 V A 35 35 35440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35


Page

53



Main circuitSwitching frequencySwitching frequency z in operating cycles/hour

• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h-1 5000 5000 5000No-load switching frequency DC h-1 1000 1000 1000

Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 900 900z’ on the operational current I’ AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 400 400 350and operational voltage U’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 1000 850z’ = z . (Ie/I’) . (400 V/U’)1.5 . 1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 300 250

• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h-1 15 15 15

Contactor Type LSD3..Size 3

Conductor cross-sectionsScrew terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) with box terminalFront clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 0.25 ... 35connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 4 ... 50

• Stranded mm² 2.5 ... 16• Solid mm² 4 ... 70• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8

(number x width x thickness)• AWG cables, AWG 10 ... 2/0

solid or stranded

Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2.5 ... 50connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 10 ... 50

• Stranded mm² 2.5 ... 16• Solid mm² 10 ... 70• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8

(number x width x thickness)• AWG cables, AWG 10 ... 2/0

solid or stranded

Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 35)connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (4 ... 35)

• Stranded mm² 2 x (2.5 ... 16)• Solid mm² 2 x (4 ... 50)• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)

(number x width x thickness)• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)

solid or stranded

• Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)- tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 (36 ... 53 lb.in)

Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10

Without box terminal with • Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503)cable lugs2) • Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703)(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • AWG cables, AWG 7 ... 1/0

solid or strandedAuxiliary conductors:• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4)

• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)4); 2 x (18 ... 14)4); 1 x 12solid or stranded

• Terminal screw M3- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)

Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)

solid or stranded

1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).2) If conductors larger than 25 mm2 are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.4) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not

apply.


Page

54



General dataPermissible mounting positionThe contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface.

Mechanical endurance Operating 10 millioncycles


Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 1000Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 690acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix NMirror contacts Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix FA mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closedsimultaneously with a NO main contact.Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +60/+55 with AS-Interface

During storage °C -55 ... +80Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, coil assembly IP20Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe with coverShock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10

Sine pulse g/ms 13.4/5 and 6.5/10Conductor cross-sections 2)

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 3)

Short-circuit protectionMain circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays seeFuse links, gL/gG Protection Equipment: Overload RelaysLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED

- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 355 355EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 315 315

• Weld-free4) A 80 160Auxiliary circuit

• Fuse links gL/gG A 10DIAZED, NEOZED(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)

• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A)

1) See first two pages of chapter Technical Specifications “Endurance of the main contacts”.2) See “Conductor cross-sections” pages onward.3) See second page of chapter Technical Specifications “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)“.4) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.

� � � � � � � � � �

� � ��


Page

55


Contactor Type LSD6.Size 6

ControlOperating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us maxPower consumption of the solenoid when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max)• Conventional operating mechanism

- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 250/0.9Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 300/0.9Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 4.8/0.8Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 5.8/0.8

- DC operation Closing at Us min W 300Closing at Us max W 360Closed at Us min W 4.3Closed at Us max W 5.2

PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption,(operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)

Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)• Conventional operating mechanism

- with 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max Closing delay ms 20 ... 95Opening delay ms 40 ... 60

- with Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 25 ... 50Opening delay ms 40 ... 60

Arcing time ms 10 ... 15


Page

56



Main circuitAC capacityUtilization category AC-1Switching resistive loadsRated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 160 185 215

at 60 °C up to 690 V A 140 160 185at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 80 90 100

Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 53 60 70P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 92 105 121

500 V kW 115 131 152690 V kW 159 181 210

1000 V kW 131 148 165

Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 °C mm² 70 95 95loads with Ie At 60 °C mm² 50 70 95Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 115 150 185

690 V A 115 150 1701000 V A 53 65 65

Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 37 50 61or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 64 84 104

500 V kW 81 105 132690 V kW 113 146 167

1000 V kW 75 90 90Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 1100 1300 1480Power loss per main current path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 7 9 13Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 97 132 160

Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 55 75 90motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz

• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 operating cycles:- rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 54 68 81

690 V A 48 57 651000 V A 34 38 42

- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 16 20 25with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 29 38 45

500 V kW 37 47 57690 V kW 48 55 65

1000 V kW 49 55 60Utilization category AC-6aswitching AC transformersRated operational current Ie• For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 115 148 148• For inrush current n = 30 up to 690 V A 90 99 99Rating P• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 45 58 58

400 V kVA 79 102 102500 V kVA 99 128 128690 V kVA 137 176 176

1000 V kVA 80 98 117

• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 35 39 39400 V kVA 62 68 68500 V kVA 77 85 85690 V kVA 107 118 118

1000 V kVA 80 98 117For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:Px = Pn 30 . 30/x

Utilization category AC-6bSwitching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitorsAmbient temperature 40 °C

Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 105 125 145

Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 42 50 58banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 72 86 100inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 90 108 125connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 72 86 100

1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account).2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.


Page

57


Main circuitDC capacityUtilization category DC-1 Switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 160

60 V A 160110 V A 18220 V A 3.4440 V A 0.8600 V A 0.5


110 V A 160220 V A 20440 V A 3.2600 V A 1.6


110 V A 160220 V A 160440 V A 11.5600 V A 4

Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 160

60 V A 7.5110 V A 2.5220 V A 0.6440 V A 0.17600 V A 0.12


110 V A 160220 V A 2.5440 V A 0.65600 V A 0.37


110 V A 160220 V A 160440 V A 1.4600 V A 0.75

Switching frequencySwitching frequency z in operating cycles/hour• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 800 800frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 400 300current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 1000 750z’ = z (Ie/I’) (400 V/U’)1.5 1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130



Contactor Type LSD6Size 6

Conductor cross-sections of main conductorsScrew terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals

without box terminal/busbar connection(box terminals on request) • Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 16 ... 95• Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 25 ... 120• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17• Terminal screw M8 x 25 (A/F 13)

- Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 14 (89 ... 124 lb.in)Auxiliary conductors:• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;

max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)

• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)• Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)

- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals(on request) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24...14)

1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use LSZ6 D001 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing.2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not

apply.



Page

59

Contactor Type LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30Size 10 10 10

General dataPermissible mounting positionThe contactors are designed foroperation on a vertical mountingsurface.







Short-circuit protectionMain circuitFuse links, gL/gGLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED

- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 500EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 400

• Weld-free4) A 250Auxiliary circuit• Fuse links gL/gG A 10

DIAZED, NEOZED(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)

Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)



� � � � � � � � � �

� � ��



Page

60


ControlOperating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us maxPower consumption of the solenoid(when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max)

• Conventional operating mechanism- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 490/0.9

Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 590/0.9Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 5.6/0.9Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 6.7/0.9

- DC operation Closing at Us min W 540Closing at Us max W 650Closed at Us min W 6.1Closed at Us max W 7.4

PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) (on request) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)• Conventional operating mechanism


- for Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 35 ... 50Opening delay ms 50 ... 80

• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15


Page

61



Main circuitAC capacityUtilization category AC-1Switching resistive loadsRated operational currents Ie at 40 °C up to 690 V A 275 330

at 60 °C up to 690 V A 250 300 at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 100 150

Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 94 113 P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 164 197

500 V kW 205 246 690 V kW 283 340

1000 V kW 164 246

Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm2 150 185 loads with Ie at 60 °C mm2 120 185 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 225 265 300

690 V A 225 265 2801000 V A 68 95 95

Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 73 85 97or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 128 151 171

500 V kW 160 189 215690 V kW 223 265 280

1000 V kW 90 132 132Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 1800 2400 2400Power loss per main current path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 17 18 22Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 195 230 280

Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 110 132 160motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz

• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 operating cycles:- rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 96 117 125

690 V A 85 105 1151000 V A 42 57 57

- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 30 37 40with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 54 66 71

500 V kW 67 82 87690 V kW 82 102 112

1000 V kW 59 80 80Utilization category AC-6aswitching AC transformersRated operational current Ie• For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 227 265 273• For inrush current n = 30 up to 690 V A 151 182 182Rating power P• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 90 105 109

400 V kVA 157 183 189500 V kVA 196 229 236690 V kVA 271 317 326

1000 V kVA 117 164 164

• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 60 72 72400 V kVA 105 126 126500 V kVA 130 158 158690 V kVA 180 217 217

1000 V kVA 117 164 164For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:Px = Pn 30 . 30/x


Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 183 200

Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 73 88 banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 127 152 inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 159 191 connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 127 152



Page

62


Main circuitDC capacityUtilization category DC-1 Switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 200 300

60 V A 200 300110 V A 18 33

220 V A 3.4 3.8440 V A 0.8 0.9600 V A 0.5 0.6


110 V A 200 300

220 V A 20 300440 V A 3.2 4600 V A 1.6 2


110 V A 200 300

220 V A 200 300440 V A 11.5 11600 V A 4 5.2

Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 200 300

60 V A 7.5 11110 V A 2.5 3

220 V A 0.6 0.6440 V A 0.17 0.18600 V A 0.12 0.125


110 V A 200 300

220 V A 2.5 2.5440 V A 0.65 0.65600 V A 0.37 0.37


110 V A 200 300

220 V A 200 300440 V A 1.4 1.4600 V A 0.75 0.75

Switching frequencySwitching frequency z in operating cycles/hour• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000 2000Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 800 800 750frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 250 300 250current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 500 700 500z’ = z (Ie/I’) (400 V/U’)1.5 .1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130 130



Page

63


Contactor Type LSDE.Size 10

Conductor cross-sections of main conductorsScrew terminals Main conductors:

without box terminal/busbar connection(box terminals on request) • Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 50 ... 240• Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 70 ... 240• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 25• Terminal screw M10 x 30 (A/F 17)

- tightening torque Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in)Auxiliary conductors:• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;


• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)• Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)

- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals(on request) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)


1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN46234 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more and according to DIN46235 for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more, theLSZED001 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.



Page

64

Contactor Type LSDG41 LSDG51Size 12 12

General dataPermissible mounting positionThe contactors are designed foroperation on a vertical mountingsurface.







Short-circuit protectionMain circuitFuse links, gL/gGLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED

- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 630 630EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 500 500

• Weld-free3) A 250 315Auxiliary circuit• Fuse links gL/gG A 10

DIAZED, NEOZED(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)

or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)



� � � � � � � � � �

� � ��


Page

65



ControlOperating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us maxPower consumption of the solenoid(when coil is cool and rated range Us min ... Us max)

• Conventional operating mechanism- AC operation Closing at Us min VA/p.f. 700/0.9

Closing at Us max VA/p.f. 830/0.9Closed at Us min VA/p.f. 7.6/0.9Closed at Us max VA/p.f. 9.2/0.9

- DC operation Closing at Us min W 770Closing at Us max W 920Closed at Us min W 8.5Closed at Us max W 10

PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) (on request) 24 V DC/≤ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)Operating times(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)• Conventional operating mechanism


- for Us min ... Us max Closing delay ms 50 ... 70Opening delay ms 70 ... 100

• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15


Page

66




at 60 °C up to 690 V A 400 550 at 60 °C up to 1000 V A 200 200

Rated power for AC loads1) at 230 V kW 151 208 P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 °C) 400 V kW 263 362

500 V kW 329 452 690 V kW 454 624

1000 V kW 329 329

Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 °C mm2 2 x 150 2 x 185 loads with Ie at 60 °C mm2 240 2 x 185 Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 400 500

690 V A 400 4501000 V A 180 180

Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 132 164or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 231 291

500 V kW 291 363690 V kW 400 453

1000 V kW 250 250Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 3200 4000Power loss per main current path at Ie/AC-3/500 V W 35 55Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V A 350 430

Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 200 250motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz

• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 operating cycles:- rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 150 175

690 V A 135 1501000 V A 80 80

- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 48 56with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 85 98

500 V kW 105 123690 V kW 133 148

1000 V kW 113 113Utilization category AC-6aswitching AC transformersRated operational current Ie• For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 377 404• For inrush current n = 30 up to 690 V A 251 270Rating power P• For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 150 161

400 V kVA 261 280500 V kVA 326 350690 V kVA 450 483

1000 V kVA 311 311

• For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 100 107400 V kVA 173 187500 V kVA 217 234690 V kVA 300 323

1000 V kVA 311 311For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:Px = Pn 30 . 30/x


Rated operational currents Ie up to 500 V A 287 407

Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 114 162 banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 199 282 inductance of 6 μH between capacitors 500 V kvar 248 352 connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 199 282



Page

67


Main circuitDC capacityUtilization category DC-1 Switching resistive load (L/R ≤ 1 ms)Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 400

60 V A 330110 V A 33

220 V A 3.8440 V A 0.9600 V A 0.6


110 V A 400

220 V A 400440 V A 4600 V A 2


110 V A 400

220 V A 400440 V A 11600 V A 5.2

Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)Rated operational current Ie (at 60 °C)• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 400

60 V A 11110 V A 3

220 V A 0.6440 V A 0.18600 V A 0.125


110 V A 400

220 V A 2.5440 V A 0.65600 V A 0.37


110 V A 400

220 V A 400440 V A 1.4600 V A 0.75

Switching frequencySwitching frequency z in operating cycles/hour• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h-1 2000 2000Dependence of the switching AC-1 h-1 700 500frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h-1 200 170current I’ and operational voltage U’: AC-3 h-1 500 420z’ = z (Ie/I’) (400 V/U’)1.5 1/h AC-4 h-1 130 130



Page

68


Contactor Type LSDG.Size 12

Conductor cross-sections of main conductorsScrew terminals Main conductors:

without box terminal/busbar connection(box terminals on request) • Finely stranded with cable lug1) mm² 50 ... 240• Stranded with cable lug1) mm² 70 ... 240• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 25

• Terminal screw M10 x 30 (A/F 17)- tightening torque Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in)

Auxiliary conductors:• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;


• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)

• Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)

Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals(on request) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)


1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN46234 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more and according to DIN46235 for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more, theLSZED001 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.




Page

69

Contactor Type LSSD07 LSSD09 LSSD12 LSS012 LSS017 LSS025LSDD07 LSDD09 LSDD12 LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025

Size 00 00 00 0 0 0 0CSA and UL rated data

Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 600Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 20 35Maximum horsepower ratings(CSA and UL approved values)

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 2 3 5 7.5at 60 Hz 230 V hp 2 3 3 3 3 5 7.5

460 V hp 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 15575 V hp 5 7.5 10 7.5 10 15 20

Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 60 60 60 70 70 70 100

Circuit breakers with overload A 50 50 50 70 70 70 100protection acc. to UL 489

Combination motor controllers type E acc. to UL 508At 480 V Type -- -- -- BES0

A -- -- -- 8 10 16 22kA -- -- -- 65 65 65 65

At 600 V Type -- -- -- BES0A -- -- -- 8 10 12.5 12.5kA -- -- -- 25 25 25 25

NEMA/EEMAC ratings

NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 0 -- 1

Uninterrupted current Open A -- 18 -- 27Enclosed A -- 18 -- 27

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5at 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5

460 V hp -- 5 -- 10575 V hp -- 5 -- 10

Thermal Overload relays Type LSTD LST0Setting range A 0.11 ... 12 1.8 ... 25

Contactor Type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250 LSD365 LSD380 LSD395Size 2 2 2 3 3 3

CSA and UL rated dataRated insulation voltage V AC 600 600Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 45 55 50 90 105 105Maximum horsepower ratings(CSA and UL approved values)

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 10 10 15 20 25 30at 60 Hz 230 V hp 10 15 15 25 30 30

460 V hp 25 30 40 50 60 75575 V hp 30 40 50 60 75 100

Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 5 5 5 10 10 10(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 125 150 200 250 300 350

Circuit breakers with overload A 125 150 200 250 300 400protection acc. to UL 489

Combination motor controllers type E acc. to UL 508

At 480 V Type BES2 BES3A 32 40 50 63 75 100kA 65 65 65 65 65 65

At 600 V Type BES3 BES3 A 32 40 50 63 75 75kA 25 25 25 30 30 30

NEMA/EEMAC ratings

NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 2 -- 3

Uninterrupted current Open A -- 45 -- 90Enclosed A -- 45 -- 90

Rated power at 200 V hp -- 10 -- 25for induction motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 15 -- 30

460 V hp -- 25 -- 50575 V hp -- 25 -- 50

Thermal Overload relays Type LST2 LST3Setting range A 5.5 ... 50 18 ... 100



Page

70

Contactor Type LSDG41 LSDG51 Size 12 12

CSA and UL rated dataRated insulation voltage V AC 600 Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 400 540Maximum horsepower ratings(CSA and UL approved values)

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 125 150at 60 Hz 230 V hp 150 200

460 V hp 300 400575 V hp 400 500

Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 18 30CLASS L fuse A 1000 1200Circuit breakers with overload A 900 900protection acc. to UL 489

NEMA/EEMAC ratings

NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 6Uninterrupted current Open A -- 600

Enclosed A -- 540

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 150with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 200

460 V hp -- 400575 V hp -- 400

Contactor Type LSD611 LSD615 LSD619 LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30Size 6 6 6 10 10 10

CSA and UL rated dataRated insulation voltage V AC 600 600Uninterrupted current, at 40 °C Open and enclosed A 140 195 195 250 330 330Maximum horsepower ratings(CSA and UL approved values)

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 40 50 60 60 75 100at 60 Hz 230 V hp 50 60 75 75 100 125

460 V hp 100 125 150 150 200 250575 V hp 125 150 200 200 250 300

Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 10 10 10 10 18 18CLASS RK5/L fuse A 450 500 500 700 800 800Circuit breakers with overload A 350 450 500 500 700 800protection acc. to UL 489

NEMA/EEMAC ratings

NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 4 -- -- -- 5Uninterrupted current Open A -- 150 -- -- -- 300

Enclosed A -- 135 -- -- -- 270

Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 40 -- -- -- 75with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 50 -- -- -- 100

460 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200575 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200

Contactor Size 00 0 ... 12Screw terminals and Screw terminals and Screw terminals andCage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals

Integrated or 1- and 4-pole Laterallysnap-on snap-on mountableauxiliary contact block auxiliary contact block auxiliary contact block

CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contactsRated voltage V AC 600 600 600Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 300

Uninterrupted currentat 240 V AC A 10 10 10


Page

71

W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW – OVERVIEW

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)The LSDH contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other devices (see chapter “Products and ordernumbers” – terminal covers).

W FUNCTION

W MAIN CONTACTSContact erosion indication with LSDH 6/8 vacuum contactorsThe contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of 3 white double slideson the contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closedposition, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3 vacuum interrupters.

W AUXILIARY CONTACTSContact reliabilityThe auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits• With currents ≥ 1 mA• And voltages from 17 V.

W SURGE SUPPRESSIONControl circuitProtection of coils against overvoltages:

AC operation• Fitted with varistors as standard

DC operationRetrofitting options:• With varistorsIf LSDH 6/8 is to be used for DC operation, an additional reversing contactor is required; this is included in the scope ofsupply in the same packaging as the vacuum contactor.

W ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)LSDH 6/8 contactors for AC operation are fitted with an electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with ahigh interference immunity.

Contactor Rated control Overvoltage Degree of Overvoltagetype supply type severity strength

voltage Us (IEC 60801) (IEC 60801)LSDH6. 110 ... 132 V Burst 3 2 kVLSDHB. Surge 4 6 kV

200 ... 277 V Burst 4 4 kVSurge 4 5 kV

380 ... 600 V Burst 4 4 kVSurge 4 6 kV

Note:During operation in installations in which the emitted interference limits cannot be observed, e.g. when used for outputcontactors in converters, LSDH6/8 contactors without a main conductor path circuit are recommended (see descriptionnext page).


Page

72

W APPLICATIONThe standard LSDH6. and LSDHB. contactors with electronically controlled contactor mechanism, have high resistance toelectromagnetic interference.

Causes for such interference can be, for example:• Frequency converters which are operated nearby can cause periodic overvoltages at the control level of the contactors.• High-energy pulses cause by switching operations and atmospheric discharges can cause interference on the control

cables.

To reduce interference voltages caused by frequency converters, the manufacturer recommends the use of e.g. input filters, output filters, grounding or shielding in the installation.

Further measures that should be applied for overvoltage damping:• Feeding the contactors using control transformer according to EN 60204 - rather than directly from the network• Use of surge arresters, if required

W CONNECTIONControl circuitThe rectifier bridge is connected to varistors for protection against overvoltages. The built-in rectifier bridge affords sufficient protection for the coils.Main circuitAs standard LSDH. contactors with integrated RC varistors.

W PROTECTION OF THE MAIN CURRENT PATHSAn integrated RC varistor connection for the main current paths of the contactors dampens the switching overvoltagerises to safe values. This prevents multiple restriking. The operator of an installation can therefore rest assured that themotor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvoltages with steep voltage rises.

Important note: The overvoltage damping circuit is not required if LSDH 6/8 contactors are used in circuits with DC choppers, frequencyconverters or speed-variable operating mechanisms, for example. It could be damaged by the voltage peaks andharmonics which are generated. This may cause phase-to-phase short-circuits in the contactors.

Solution: Order special contactor version without overvoltage damping. (on request)

W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW – OVERVIEW


Page

73

W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW

Contactor Type LSDH6 and LSDH8 Rated data of the auxiliary contacts Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690(degree of pollution 3)

Continuous thermal current A 10Ith =Rated operational current Ie/AC-12AC loadRated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14for rated operational voltage Ue

24 V A 10110 V A 10125 V A 10220 V A 6230 V A 5.6380 V A 4400 V A 3.6500 V A 2.5660 V A 2.5690 V A 2.3

DC loadRated operational current Ie/DC-12for rated operational voltage Ue

24 V A 1060 V A 10

110 V A 3.2125 V A 2.5220 V A 0.9440 V A 0.33600 V A 0.22

Rated operational current Ie/DC-13for rated operational voltage Ue

24 V A 1060 V A 5

110 V A 1.14125 V A 0.98220 V A 0.48440 V A 0.13600 V A 0.07

CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contactsRated voltage V AC, 600

max.Switching capacity A 600, P 600


Page

74

Endurance of the auxiliary contacts

The contact endurance for utilization category AC-12 or AC-15/AC-14 depends mainly onthe breaking current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly,i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.


LSDH6 and LSDH8 contactors at 230 V AC

Endurance of the auxiliary contacts

LSDH6 and LSDH8 contactorsLegend for the diagrams:PN = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 VIa = Breaking currentIe = Rated operational current

Contact erosion indication with LSDH6 and LSDH8 vacuum contactors

The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the contactor base.If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is rec-ommended to replace all 3 vacuum interrupters.

�

�

�

��

�

�

�

��

�

�

�

��

�

��

� � ��

Op

era

ting

LSDH6 LSDH8


Page

75


Contactor Type LSDH6 LSDH8Size 14 14

General dataPermissible mounting position, AC operation and DC operationinstallation instructions1) 2)

The contactors are designed foroperation on a vertical mountingsurface.Mechanical endurance Operating 5 million

cyclesElectrical endurance Operating 3)

cyclesRated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) kV 1Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts kV 1acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix NPermissible ambient temperature During operation °C -25 ... +55

During storage °C -55 ... +80Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, coil assembly IP40Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe with coverShock resistance• Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.1/5 and 4.7/10 9.5/5 and 5.7/10

DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 5.7/10 8.6/5 and 5.1/10

• Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.8/5 and 7.4/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10DC operation g/ms 14.4/5 and 9.1/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10

Conductor cross-sections See Conductor Cross-Sections page 78Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4)

Short-circuit protectionMain circuitFuse links, gL/gGLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 1000 1250

EN 60947-4-1 • Type of coordination "2" A 500 630• Weld-free5) A 400 500

Auxiliary circuit• Fuse links gL/gG A 10LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1kA)

• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A) A 10

1) To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary switches it is recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 30 mm between the contactors.2) If mounted at a 90° angle (conducting paths are horizontally above each other), the switching frequency is reduced by 80 % compared with the normal values.3) See page before “Endurance of the auxiliary contacts”.4) See first page of chapter Technical Specifications – LSDH vacuum contactors “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)“.5) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.

� � � � � � � � � �

� � ��


Page

76



ControlMagnetic coil operating range 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us maxPower consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)• AC operation, Us max - Closing VA/p.f. 1850/1 950/0.98

- Closed VA/p.f. 49/0.15 30.6/0.31

• AC operation, Us min - Closing VA/p.f. 1200/1 600/0.98- Closed VA/p.f. 13.5/0.47 12.9/0.43

• DC economy circuit1) - Closing at 24 V W 1010 960- Closed W 28 20.6

Operating times at 0,8 ... 1.1 x Us (Values apply to cold and warm coil)(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)• AC operation - Closing delay ms 70 ... 120 (22 ... 65)2) 80 ... 120

- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70 ... 80

• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 76 ... 110 86 ... 280- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25

• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10Operating times at 1.0 x Us

(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)• AC operation - Closing delay ms 80 ... 100 (30 ... 45)2) 85 ... 100

- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70

• DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 80 ... 90 90 ... 125- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25

Minimum command duration Standard ms 120 120for closing Reduced make-time ms 90 --Minimum interval time between two ON commands ms 100 300

1) At 24 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to ±10 % are possible.2) Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times.


Page

77




at 55 °C up to 690 V A 630 850at 55 °C up to 1000 V A 450 800

Rated power for AC loads 230 V kW 240 323with p.f. = 0.95 at 55°C 400 V kW 415 558

500 V kW 545 735690 V kW 720 970

1000 V kW 780 1385

Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads at 40°C mm² 2 x 240 Ie ≥ 800 A: 2 x 60 x 5 (Cu busbars)with Ie at 55°C mm² 2 x 185 Ie < 800 A: 2 x 240Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3Rated operational currents Ie up to 690 V A 630 820

1000 V A 435 580

Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 200 260motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 347 450

500 V kW 434 600690 V kW 600 800

1000 V kW 600 800Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V A 610 690Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 at 400 V kW 355 400Hz and 60 Hz

• The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 operating cycles:Rated operational currents Ie up to 690 V A 300 360

1000 V A 210 250

Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 97 110with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 168 191

500 V1) kW 210 250690 V1) kW 278 335

1000 V1) A 290 350Utilization category AC-6aswitching AC transformersRated operational currents Ie up to 400 V

• For inrush current n = 20 A 513 675• For inrush current n = 30 A 342 450Rating PFor inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 195 256

400 V kVA 338 445500 V kVA 444 584690 V kVA 586 771

1000 V kVA 752 1003

For inrush current n = 302) 230 V kVA 130 171400 V kVA 226 297500 V kVA 296 389690 V kVA 390 514

1000 V kVA 592 778Utilization category AC-6b,switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric)AC capacitorsRated operational currents Ie up to 400 V A 433

Rated power for single capacitors at 230 V kvar 175at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kvar 300

500 V kvar 400690 V kvar 300

Rated power for banks of capacitors (minimum at 230 V kvar 145inductance is 6 H between capacitors connected 400 V kvar 250in parallel) at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kvar 333

690 V kvar 250

1) Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/AC-4 = Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency.2) For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows: Px = Pn30 . 30/x.



Page

78


Main circuitAC capacityShort-time current carrying capacity (5 ... 30 s)• CLASS 5 and 10 A 630 820• CLASS 15 A 630 662• CLASS 20 A 536 572• CLASS 25 A 479 531• CLASS 30 A 441 500

Thermal current-carrying capacity 10-s-current1) A 5040 7000

Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3 /690 V W 45 70Switching frequencySwitching frequency z in operating cycles/hour• Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC 1/h 2000 1000

No-load switching frequency DC 1/h 1000 1000AC-1 1/h 700 700AC-2 1/h 200 200AC-3 1/h 500 500AC-4 1/h 150 150

• Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 15 15Conductor cross-sections

• Screw terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals• Busbar connections

- finely stranded with cable lug mm² 50 ... 240 50 ... 240- stranded with cable lug mm² 70 ... 240 50 ... 240- solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 MCM 2/0 ... 500 MCM- connecting bar (max. width) mm 50 60 (Ue ≤ 690 V)

50 (Ue > 690 V)

• Terminal screw M10 x 30 M12 x 40- tightening torque Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 20 ... 35 (177 ... 310 lb.in)

• With box terminal (on request)

- connectable copper bars- width mm 15 ... 25 15 ... 38- max. thickness mm 1 x 26 or 2 x 11 1 x 46 or 2 x 18- terminal screw A/F 6 (hexagon socket) A/F 8 (hexagon socket)- tightening torque Nm 25 ... 40 (221 ... 354 lb.in) 35 ... 50 (266 ... 443 lb.in)Auxiliary conductors:• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1)2)/2 x (1 ... 2.5)2)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1)2)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)

• Pin-end connector to DIN 46231 mm² 2 x (1 ... 1.5)• Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 12)• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.4 (7 ... 12 lb.in)

CSA and UL rated dataRated insulation voltage V AC 600 600Uninterrupted current Open and enclosed A 630 820Maximum horsepower ratings(CSA and UL approved values)Rated power for induction motors at at 200 V hp 231 29060 Hz

230 V hp 266 350460 V hp 530 700575 V hp 664 860

NEMA/EEMAC ratingsSIZE hp 6 7Uninterrupted current Open A 600 820

Enclosed A 540 810Rated power for induction motors at at 200 V hp 150 --60 Hz 230 V hp 200 300

460 V hp 400 600575 V hp 400 600

1) According to IEC 60947-4-1.2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not

apply.


Page

79

W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS – OVERVIEW

W AC OPERATIONEN60947-4-1 (VDE0660 Part102).The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according toEN50274. The accessories for the 3-pole ALEA contactors can also be used for the 4-pole versions.

W FUNCTION• Switching resistive loads• Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral conductors• System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are used• As contactors, e.g.for variable-speed operating mechanisms which only have to carry current and not switch

W INTEGRATIONW MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACTS

Size 004 auxiliary contacts (according to EN50005)

Size 0 Maximum 2 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top).

Size 2–3 Maximum 4 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top)

W CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY WITH MECHANICAL INTERLOCKThe 4-pole LSR contactors with 4NO contacts as the main contacts are suitable for making contactor assemblies with amechanical interlock, e.g.for system transfers.

Size 00 Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two LSRD contactors in conjunction with mechanical interlocks and twoconnecting clips (Order No.: LSZDW002).

Size 0 When constructing 4-pole contactor assemblies from two LSR0 contactors, the fourth pole of the left contactor mustalways be moved to the left side. If the laterally mountable LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock is used, the contactor assembly is connected with LSZ0W004 (2 pcs.).

Sizes 2 and 3 Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two LSR2 or two LSR3 contactors in conjunction with the laterally mount-able LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock and the LSZ2W002 for size 2 or LSZ3W002 for size 3.


Page

80

W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS (AC-1)4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A

Contactor Type LSRD18 LSRD22 LSR035 LSR040 LSR260 LSR311 LSR314Size 00 0 2 3 3

General dataPermissible mounting position1)

Mechanical endurance Operating 30 million 10 millioncycles

Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1 Operating Approx. 0.5 millioncycles

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690(degree of pollution 3)Permissible ambient temperature During operation °C –25 ... +60

During storage °C –55 ... +80Degree of protection Device Operating IP20 IP20Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C Connection range cycles IP00Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe

Short-circuit protection of contactors without thermal overload relaysMain circuitFuse links, Type of coordination „1“1) A 35 63 160 250 250gL/gG operational class Type of coordination „2“1) A 20 25/35 63 125 160LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED

- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Weld-free A 10 16 50 63 100EN 60947-4-1

ControlMagnetic coil operating range

AC at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

AC at 60 Hz 0.85 ...1.1 x Us

DC at 50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

DC at 60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

Power consumption of the magnetic coils(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)AC operation, 50 Hz • Closing VA 61 145 270

• P.f. VA 0.82 0.79 0.68

• Closed VA 7.8 12.5 22• P.f. VA 0.24 0.36 0.27

AC operation, 50/60 Hz • Closing VA 26.5/24.3 64/63 170/155 298/274• P.f. 0.79/0.75 0.82/0.74 0.76/0.72 0.72/0.62

• Closed VA 4.4/3.4 8.4/6.8 15/11.8 27/20• P.f. 0.27/0.27 0.24/0.28 0.35/0.38 0.29/0.31

DC operation • Closing W 3.3 5.6 13.3 15= Closed


Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time• DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 30 ... 90 50 ... 110 110 ... 200

Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 13 ... 40 15 ... 30 14 ... 20

• AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 6 ... 30 4 ... 35 20 ... 50Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 13 ... 25 10 ... 30 10 ... 25

• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15Main circuit

AC capacityUtilization category AC-1, switching resistive loadsRated operational currents Ie at 40 °C, up to 690 V A 18 22 35 40 60 110 140

at 60 °C, up to 690 V A 16 20 30 35 55 100 120

Rated power for AC loads at 230 V kW 7 8.5 12.5 15 23 42 53P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 °C) 400 V kW 12 14.5 22 26 39 72 92

Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50for loads with Ie at 60 °C mm² 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3Rated operational currents Ie at 60°C, up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25 26 -- --

Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 5.5 -- --or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 -- --at 50 Hz and 60 Hz

1) In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole LSD contactors.2) With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.


Page

81


Contactor Type LSRD18 LSRD22 LSR035 LSR040Size 00 0

Main circuitDC capacityUtilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)

Rated operational currents Ie (at 40 °C)


110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5

220 V A 0.8 0.8 1440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4


110 V A 12 12 35

220 V A 1.6 1.6 5440 V A 0.8 0.8 1


110 V A 18 22 35

220 V A 18 22 35440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9


110 V A 18 22 35

220 V A 18 22 35440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9

Utilization category DC-3/DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)


• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 18 20 2060 V A 0.5 0.5 5

110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5

220 V A -- -- 1440 V A -- -- 0.09


110 V A 0.35 0.35 15

220 V A -- -- 3440 V A -- -- 0.27


110 V A 18 20 35

220 V A 1.5 1.5 10440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6


110 V A 18 20 35

220 V A 1.5 1.5 35440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6

Maximum breaking current ACe.g. for isolation of load distributions• 50/60 Hz 400 V A 72 96 200


Page

82


Contactor Type LSR260 LSR311 LSR314Size 2 3 3

Main circuitDC capacityUtilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)



110 V A 4.5 4.5 9

220 V A 1 1 2440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.6


110 V A 45 70 80

220 V A 5 5 10440 V A 1 1 1.8


110 V A 45 70 80

220 V A 45 70 80440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5


110 V A 45 70 80

220 V A 45 70 80440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5

Utilization category DC-3/DC-5Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)


• 1 conducting path up to 24 V A 20 20 2060 V A 6 6 6.5

110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5

220 V A 1 1 1440 V A 0.1 0.15 0.15


110 V A 25 70 80

220 V A 5 7 7440 V A 0.27 0.42 0.42


110 V A 45 70 80

220 V A 25 35 35440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8


110 V A 45 70 80

220 V A 45 70 80440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8

Maximum breaking current AC

e.g. for isolation of load distributions• 50/60 Hz 400 V A 400 520 760


Page

83

W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, 4-POLE

Contactor Type LSHSize 00

Permissible mounting positionThe contactors are designed for operation AC and DC operationon a vertical mounting surface.

Upright mounting position AC operation

Special version requiredDC operation Standard version

Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relaysLSH: Explanations:Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary contact block as well as between the There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NObasic unit and the snap-on auxiliary contact block (removable) acc. to: contacts cannot be closed at the same time.• ZH 1/457• EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457

Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metalworking industry.

EN 60947-5-1, Appendix LLow-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.Special requirements for positively-driven contacts

SUVAAccident prevention regulations of the „Schweizer Unfallverhütungsanstalt“(Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)

Contact reliabilityContact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to EN 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults <10–8, i.e. <1 fault per 100 million operating cycles

Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13 utilization categoriesThe contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits are necessary.RC elements and freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective measures.The characteristic curves apply to:• LSH auxiliary contactors• LSZDH5 and LSZD05 auxiliary contact blocks

Diagram legend:Ia = Breaking currentIe = Rated operational current

1) Snap-on auxiliary contact blocks: Ie/DC-13 max. 6 A.

� � � � � � � � � ��


Page

84


Contactor Type LSHDSize 00

CSA and UL rated dataBasic units and auxiliary contact blocks• Rated control supply voltage V AC max. 600• Rated voltage V AC 600• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600• Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10

General dataMechanical endurance Basic units Operating 30 million

cyclesBasic unit with snap-on auxiliary Operating 10 millioncontact block cyclesSolid-state compatible auxiliary Operating 5 millioncontact block cycles

Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6Safe isolation between the coil and the contacts in the basic unit V 400acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix NPermissible ambient temperature During operation °C –25 ... +60

During storage °C –55 ... +80Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safeShock resistanceRectangular pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10Sine pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10

Conductor cross-sectionsScrew terminals Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Screw terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12• Terminal screws M3

- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Cage Clamp terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)

Short-circuit protection(weld-free protection at Ik ≥1 kA)• Fuse links, gL/gG operational class

- DIAZED A 10- NEOZED A 10

• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 6(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)

An „insulation stop“ must be used for conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm².Maximum external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.


Page

85



ControlMagnetic coil operating rangeAC operation at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

DC operation at +50 °C 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

at +60 °C 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

Power consumption of the magnetic coils(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)AC operation, 50 Hz • Closing VA/p.f. 27/0.8

• Closed VA/p.f. 4.6/0.27

AC operation, 60 Hz • Closing VA/p.f. 24/0.75• Closed VA/p.f. 3.5/0.27

DC operation Closing = Closed W 3.2Permissible residual current of the electronics(with 0 signal)

for AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/Us)for DC operation <10 mA x (24 V/Us)

Operating times1)

(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)AC operation Values apply with coil in cold stateClosing and at operating temperature for

operating range

• ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 8 ... 351.0 x Us ms 10 ... 25

• OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 6 ... 201.0 x Us ms 7 ... 20

Opening• OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 4 ... 30

1.0 x Us ms 5 ... 30

• ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 5 ... 301.0 x Us ms 7 ... 20

DC operationClosing• ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 25 ... 100

1.0 x Us ms 30 ... 50

• OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 20 ... 901.0 x Us ms 25 ... 45

Opening• OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 7 ... 10

1.0 x Us ms 7 ... 9

• ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us ms 13 ... 161.0 x Us ms 13 ... 15

Arcing time ms 10 ... 15

Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I’ andoperational voltage U’z’ = z . Ie/I’ . (Ue/U’)1.5 . 1/h

1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attentuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;

diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).


Page

86



Load sideRated operational currents IeAC-12 A 10AC-15/AC-14 up to 230 V A 6for rated operational voltage Us 400 V A 3

500 V A 2690 V A 1

DC-12for rated operational voltage Us

• 1 conducting path 24 V A 1060 V A 6

110 V A 3220 V A 1440 V A 0.3600 V A 0.15

• 2 conducting paths in series 24 V A 1060 V A 10

110 V A 4220 V A 2440 V A 1.3600 V A 0.65

• 3 conducting paths in series 24 V A 1060 V A 10

110 V A 10220 V A 3.6440 V A 2.5600 V A 1.8

DC-13for rated operational voltage Us

• 1 conducting path 24 V A 101)

60 V A 2110 V A 1220 V A 0.3440 V A 0.14600 V A 0.1

• 2 conducting paths in series 24 V A 1060 V A 3.5

110 V A 1.3220 V A 0.9440 V A 0.2600 V A 0.1

• 3 conducting paths in series 24 V A 1060 V A 4.7

110 V A 3220 V A 1.2440 V A 0.5600 V A 0.26

Switching frequency z• In operating cycles/h AC-12/DC-12 h–1 1000

during normal duty AC-15/AC-14 h–1 1000for utilization category DC-13 h–1 1000

• No-load switching frequency h–1 10000

Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I’ andoperational voltage U’z’ = z . Ie/I’ . (Ue/U’)1.5 . 1/h

1) Snap-on auxiliary contact blocks: 6 A.


Page

87

W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW

W DC OPERATIONIEC 60947 and EN 60947 (VDE 0660).The LSH auxiliary contactors for switching auxiliary circuits are tailored to the special requirements of working with electron-ic controls. The LSHD ... G/N auxiliary contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contact blocks.

W FUNCTIONNo auxiliary contact blocks can be snapped onto these auxiliary contactors. They have a low power consumption, an extendedmagnetic coil operating range and an integrated surge suppressor for damping opening surges (exception: LSHD ... N).

W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSAll technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSH auxiliary contactors.

Contactor Type LSHD ... N LSH ... GSize 00 00

Magnetic coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x UsPower consumption of the magnetic coil (for cold coil)Closing = closedAt Us = 17 V W 1.2At Us = 24 V W 2.3At Us = 30 V W 3.6Permissible residual current <10 mA x (24 V/Us)of the electronics for 0 signalOvervoltage configuration of the magnetic coil No overvoltage damping With diode integrated

Operating times• Closing at 17 V

- ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120- OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70

• At 24 V- ON-delay NO ms 30 ... 60- OFF-delay NC ms 20 ... 40

• At 30 V- ON-delay NO ms 20 ... 50- OFF-delay NC ms 15 ... 30

• Closing at 17 ... 30 V- OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 17 40 ... 60- ON-delay NC ms 22 ... 30 60 ... 70

Upright mounting position Please ask


Page

88

W LSS CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE – OVERVIEW

W DC OPERATIONIEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660).The LSS contactors for switching motors are tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic controls.The LSSD contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contacts or contact blocks.Two single-pole auxiliary contacts can be fitted to the LSS0 contactors.

W FUNCTIONLSS contactors have a low power consumption, an extended operating range of the magnetic coil and an integrated surgesuppressor for damping opening surges.

W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSAll technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSDD and LSD0 contactors for switching motors. The LSSD contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contacts or contact blocks. Two single-pole auxil-iary contacts LSZ0D010/D001 can be fitted to the LSS0 contactor (see Accessories).

Contactor Type LSSD ... G LSS0 ... HSize 00 0

General dataMechanical endurance Operating 30 million 10 million

cyclesSafe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 400acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N

ControlMagnetic coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us

Power consumption of the at Us 17 V W 1.2 2.1magnetic coil 24 V W 2.3 4.2(for cold coil) 30 V W 3.6 6.6Closing = closedPermissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/Us) < 6 mA x (24 V/Us)of the electronics (for 0 signal)Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil With diode With varistor

Operating times of the contactors for PLC-use• Closing

- at 17 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120 93 ... 270OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70 83 ... 250



• Opening at 17... 30 V OFF-delay NO ms 40 ... 60 18 ... 19ON-delay NC ms 60 ... 70 24 ... 25

�


Page

89

W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD AND LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W SNAP-ON AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKSThe auxiliary contact blocks and the maximum number of contacts that can be mounted are described in the sections„Contactors“ and „Auxiliary Contactors“.

OperationIn the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of 110 V and 230 V, either AC voltage or DC voltage can be appliedon the line side, whereas the variant for 24 V is designed for DC operation only. A DC-operated contactor is connected to theoutput in accordance with the input voltage that is applied. The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times thespecified minimum time.

W SURGE SUPPRESSION• (also for Cage Clamp terminals on request) size 00, 0, 2, 3, 6 to 12All LSD contactors and LSH auxiliary contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surgesin the coil. Diodes or diode assemblies can be used. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size 00 contactors.Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary contact block. With all size 0 to 3 contactors, varistors, RC elements anddiode assemblies can be plugged on directly at the coil terminals, either on the top or underneath. The plug-in direction of thediodes and diode assemblies is determined by a coding device. Auxiliary contactors are supplied either without overvoltagedamping or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, according to the version.

Note: The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils aredamped against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).

W SOLDER PIN ADAPTERSThe solder pin adapters for the size 00 contactors are available in version for:• contactors with one integrated auxiliary contact

W SEALABLE COVERS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (ON REQUEST)When contactors and auxiliary contactors are used in safety-oriented applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to operate the contactors manually. For ALEA contactors there are sealable covers available for this purpose on requets; these preventaccidental manual operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed.

W MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCKTechnical specifications according to EN 61812-1 (VDE 0435 Part 2021)

Contactor Type LSZ00113Mechanical latching block for the LSD0 and LSD2 contactors

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690(degree of pollution 3)Mechanical endurance with LSD0 3 million(operating cycles) with LSD2 50000Permissible ambient temperature• During operation °C –25 ... +60• During storage °C –50 ... +80Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20Operating range of the magnetic coil 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

at AC 50/60 Hz and DCPower consumption of the magnetic coils of the unlocking magnet W Approx. 4(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)AC and DC operationCommand duration for de-energizing• AC operation ms 18 ... 31• DC operation ms 18 ... 26Conductor cross-sections• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 4

AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 2.5AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12

Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1lb.in 7 ... 9.5


Page

90

W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS – OVERVIEW

W AC OPERATIONIEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660)The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The LSK capacitor contactorsare special version of the size 00 to 3 ALEA contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means of the mounted leading NOcontacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the network and welding of thecontactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors. The auxiliary contact blockwhich is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the case of 00 one standard NCcontact and in the case of 0 and 3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size 00 also contains another unassignedNO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can be mounted laterally on the LSK3 capacitor contactors (1 NO + 1 NC versions); type LSZ0D711. The fitting of auxiliary switches for LSKD and LSK0 is not expandable. Forthe capacitor switching capacity of the basic LSD contactor version, see Technical specifications.

W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSAll technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSDD contactors for size 00, to thoseof the LSD0 contactors for size 0 and to those of the LSD3 contactors for size 3.

Contactor Type LSKD17B3 LSK03213 LSK36213Size 00 0 3

Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 3 … 7.5 3.5 … 15 3.5 … 30rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 5 … 12.5 6 … 25 5 … 50(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 7.5 … 15 7.8 … 30 7.5 … 60

690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 10 … 21 10 … 42 10 … 84Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NOAuxiliary contacts mountable (lateral), not for sizes 00 and 0 -- 2 NC + 2 NO or

1 NO + 1 NCMagnetic coil operating range 0.8 … 1.1 x Us

Max. switching frequency h–1 180 100Electrical endurance Operating > 250000 > 150000 > 100000

cyclesAmbient temperature °C ≤ 60Standards IEC 60947/EN 60947 (VDE 0660)Short-circuit protection 1.6 ... 2.2 x Ie

Conductor cross-sectionsScrew terminals Main conductors Screw terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5);

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)Acc. to IEC 60947; Acc. to IEC 60947;Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) Max. 1 x 101)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5);2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)

• AWG cables- solid AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (16 ... 12)- solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10)- stranded AWG 1 x 12 1 x 8

• Terminal screws M3 M4 (Pozidriv size 2)- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5

lb.in 7 ... 10.3 18 ... 22Coil voltage

0.85 – 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50/60 Hz 230 VAC; 50 Hz 230 VAC; 50 Hz

1) BEZ00116 feeder terminal for 25 mm²

W MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONSIn the area of capacitor switching contactors, difficulty inflammable and self-extinguishing materials may be used only, because abnormal temperatures within the area of the resistance spirals cannot be excluded.


Page

91

W LSK CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, 12.5 ... 50 kVAR

Contactor Type LSKD17B3 LSK03213 LSK36213Size 00 0 3

Conductor cross-sectionsScrew terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) with box terminal

Front clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2.5 ... 35connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 4 ... 50

• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16• Stranded mm² 4 ... 70

• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8(number x width x thickness)

• AWG cables, AWG 10 ... 2/0solid or stranded

Rear clamping point • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2.5 ... 50connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 10 ... 50

• Solid mm² 2.5 ... 16• Stranded mm² 10 ... 70

• Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8(number x width x thickness)


Both clamping points • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35connected • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² Max. 2 x 35

• Solid mm² Max. 2 x 16• Stranded mm² Max. 2 x 50

• Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)(number x width x thickness)

• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)solid or stranded

• Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)- tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6

lb.in 36 ... 53

Connection for drilled copper bars1) Max. width mm 10

Without box terminal with cable lugs2) • Finely stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 503)

(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Stranded with cable lug mm² 10 ... 703)


Auxiliary conductors:• Solid mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4);

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) 0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)max. 2 x (1 ... 4)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4);2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4)

• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)4);solid or stranded 2 x (18 ... 14)4); 1 x 12

• Terminal screw M3- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2

lb.in 7 ... 10.3Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors:(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) • Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

• AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)solid or stranded SD

1) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance. (on request)2) When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm2, the terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. (on request)3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.4) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not apply.


Page

92


W AC OPERATIONContactors LA3K are suitable for switching low-inductive and low loss capacitors in capacitor banks (IEC70 and 831, VDE 0560) without and with reactors. Capacitor switching contactors are fitted with early make contacts and dampingresistors, to reduce the value of make current <70 x Ie.

W OPERATING CONDITIONSCapacitor switching contactors are protected against contact welding for a prospective making current of 200 x Ie.

W MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONSIn the area of capacitor switching contactors, difficulty inflammable and self-extinguishing materials may be used only, because abnormal temperatures within the area of the resistance spirals cannot be excluded.

W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSacc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660

Contactor Type LA3K1813 LA3K1823 LA3K2433 LA3K3233Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 – 7 0 – 7 5 – 11 5 – 14rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 – 12.5 0 – 12.5 10 – 20 20 – 25(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 – 15 0 – 15 12 – 25 12 – 32

690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 – 18 0 – 18 14 – 28 14 – 36Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1NO 1NC Auxiliary contacts mountable snap on front 1NC/6A 1NC/6A

LA190135 LA1901351NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3ALA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA1901001NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3ALA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101

side mounted 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3ALA190134 LA190134

Magnetic coil operating range -- -- -- --Max. switching frequency h–1 120 120 120 120Electrical endurance Operating 250000 250000 150000 150000

cyclesRated operational current Ie at 50°C A 14 – 18 14 – 18 14 – 28 14 – 36

at 60°C A 14 – 18 14 – 18 14 – 28 14 – 36Ambient temperature °C ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1)

Standards IEC 947-4-1 / EN 60947-4-1 / VDE 0660Short-circuit protection fuse gL/gG A 35 – 63 35 – 63 50 – 80 63 – 100

Conductor cross-sectionsFor contactors without thermal overload relay

• 1 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm² 0.75 – 6 1.5 – 25flexible mm² 1 – 4 2.5 – 16flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.75 – 4 1.5 – 16

• 2 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm² 6 + (1 – 6) / 4 + (0.75 – 4) 16 + (2.5 – 6) / 10 + (4 – 10)2.5 + (0.75 – 2.5) / 1.5 + (0.75 – 1.5) 6 + (4 – 6) / 4 + (2.5 – 4)

flexible mm² 6 + (1.5 – 6) / 4 + (1 – 4) 16 + (2.5 – 6) / 10 + (4 – 10)2.5 + (0.75 – 2.5) / 1.5 + (0.75 – 1.5) 6 + (4 – 6) / 4 + (2.5 – 4)

• Cables per clamp 2 2

For main connector

• 1 cable per clamp solid AWG 18 – 10 16 – 10flexible AWG 18 – 10 14 – 4

• 2 cable per clamp solid AWG 10 + (16 – 10) / 12 + (18 – 12) 10 + (16 – 10) / 12 + (18 – 12)14 + (18 – 16) / 16 + (18 – 16) 14 + (18 – 16) / 16 + (18 – 16)

flexible AWG 10 + (14 – 10) / 12 + (18 – 12) 4 + (18 – 12) / 6 + (18 – 8)14 + (18 – 14) / 16 + (18 – 16) 8 + (18 – 8) / 10 + (18 – 12)

• Cables per clamp 2 2

Coil voltage

0.85 – 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50 Hz

Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 10 10DC operated S x 106 10 10

Short time current 10 S current A 144 240Power loss per pole at Ie / AC3 400V W 0.5 1.3

1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x US and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 accordung to Ie/AC3


Page

93

W LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORSacc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660

Contactor Type LA3K5044 LA3K6233 LA3K7433 LA3K9033 LA3K1133Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 12 – 20 12 – 28 12 – 30 22 – 40 20 – 50rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 20 – 33.3 20 – 50 20 – 60 33 – 75 33 – 80(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 26 – 43 26 – 64 26 – 75 45 – 95 45 – 115

690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 87 50 – 108 50 – 130Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) -- -- -- -- -- Auxiliary contacts mountable snap on front 1NC/6A

LA1901351NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3ALA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA1901001NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3ALA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101

side mounted 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3ALA190134 LA190134 LA190134 LA190134 LA190134

Magnetic coil operating range -- -- -- -- --Max. switching frequency h–1 120 120 80 80 80Electrical endurance Operating 150000 150000 120000 120000 120000

cyclesRated operational current Ie at 50°C A 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 108 50 – 115 50 – 144

at 60°C A 30 – 48 30 – 72 30 – 78 50 – 108 50 – 130Ambient temperature °C ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1) ≤ 60 (90) 1)

Standards IEC 947-4-1 / EN 60947-4-1 / VDE 0660Short-circuit protection fuse gL/gG A 80 – 160 125 – 160 160 – 200 160 – 200 160 – 250

Conductor cross-sectionsFor contactors without thermal overload relay

• 1 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm² 4 – 50flexible mm² 10 – 35flexible with multicore cable end mm² 6 – 35

• 2 cable per clamp top belowsolid or stranded mm² 50 + 4 / 35 + 6 / 25 + (6 – 16) 0.5 – 95 10 – 120

16 + (6 – 16) / 10 + (6 – 16)flexible mm² 50 + (4 – 10) / 35 + (4 – 16) 0.5 – 70 10 – 95

25 + (4 – 25) / 16 + (4 – 16)• Cables per clamp 2 1 + 1

For main connector

• 1 cable per clamp solid AWG 12 – 10flexible AWG 10 – 0

• 2 cable per clamp top belowsolid AWG 10 + (12 – 10) / 12 + 12 18 – 10 --flexible AWG 1 + (12 – 10) / 2 + (8 – 12) 18 – 3 / 0 8 – 4 / 0

3 + (12 – 8) / 4 + (10 – 6)• Cables per clamp 2 1 + 1

Coil voltage

0.85 – 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50 Hz

Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 10 10 10 10 5DC operated S x 106 10 10 10 10 5

Short time current 10 S current A 360 504 592 680 880Power loss per pole at Ie / AC3 400V W 2.2 3.9 5.5 4.3 6.0

1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x US and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 accordung to Ie/AC3


Page

94

W LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORSaacc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660

Mounted auxiliary contacts Type LA3K18 LA3K24,..32,..40 LA3K50,..62,..74 LA3K90,..115Rated insulation voltage Ui

1) V~ 690 -- -- --Thermal rated current Ith to 690VAmbient temperature 40°C A 16 -- -- --

60°C A 12 -- -- --Utilization category AC15Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 12 -- -- --

380-415V A 4 -- -- --440V A 4 -- -- --500V A 3 -- -- --660-690V A 1 -- -- --

Utilization category DC13Rated operational current Ie 60V A 8 -- -- --

110V A 1 -- -- --220V A 0.1 -- -- --

Short circuit protectionshort-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not acceptedmax. fuse size gL (gG) A 25 -- -- --

Control CircuitPower consumption of coilsAC operated inrush VA 33-45 90-115 140-165 190-280

sealed VA 7-10 9-13 13-18 2,5-5W 2.6-3 2.7-4 5.4-7 2.5-5

DC operated inrush W 75 140 200 190-280sealed W 2 2 6 2,5-5

Operation range of coilsin multiples of control voltage Us AC operated 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1

DC operated 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1Switching time

At control voltage Us ±10% 2) 3)

AC operated make time ms 8-16 10-25 12-28 20-35release time ms 5-13 8-15 8-15 35-50arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15

DC operated make time ms 8-12 10-20 12-23 20-35release time ms 8-13 10-15 10-18 35-50arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15

Cable cross-sectionAuxiliary connector solid mm² 0.75-6 -- -- --

flexible mm² 1-4 -- -- --flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.75-4 -- -- --

Magnet coil solid mm² 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5flexible mm² 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5

Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2Auxiliary connector solid AWG 18-10 -- -- --

flexible AWG 18-10 -- -- --Magnet coil solid AWG 14-12 14-12 14-12 14-12

flexible AWG 18-12 18-12 18-12 18-12Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2

Auxiliary contacts snap on or side mounted Type LA190135 LA190034 LA190100 LA1901011 NC 1 NO+1 NC 1 NO 1 NC

AC15 230V A 6 3 3 3AC15 400V A 4 2 2 2AC1 690V A 25 10 2 2

1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request2) Total breaking time = release time + arc duration3) Values for delay of the release time of the make contact and the make time of the break contact will be increased, if magnet coils are protected against voltage peaks (varistor, RC-unit,

diode-unit)


Page

95

W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW

The LSW reversing contactor assemblies can be ordered as follows:

Sizes 00 to 3• Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and electrical interlock. For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead

interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages ≥ 500 V; a dead interval of 30 ms is recommend for usewith voltages ≥ 400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with DC operation.

Sizes 00 to 12For overload relays for motor protection, see “Protection Equipment: Thermal overload relays”. The LSW contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting rails.

W COMPLETE UNITS UP TO SIZE 3The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The contactor assemblies consist of 2 contactors with the same power, with one NC contact in the basic unit.The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock). For motor protection, LST thermal overload relays for direct mounting or stand-alone installation must be ordered separately.

Rated data AC-2 and AC-3 at AC Included in complete unit50 Hz 400 V Size Order No.

Rating Operational Contactor Mechanical Wiring set AC230V/50/60 HZcurrent Ie interlock2) Fully wired and tested

kW A contactor assemblies3 7 00 LSDD07 -- LSZDW0015) LSWD07334 9 LSDD09 LSWD09335.5 12 LSDD12 LSWD12335.5 12 0 LSD012 LSZ0W002 LSZ0W0016) LSW012337.5 17 LSD017 LSW0173311 25 LSD025 LSW0253315 32 2 LSD232 LSZ0W002 LSZ2W0017) LSW2323318.5 40 LSD240 LSW2403322 50 LSD250 LSW2503330 65 3 LSD365 LSZ0W002 LSZ3W0017) LSW3653337 80 LSD380 LSW3803345 95 LSD395 LSW39533

2) Laterally mountable with two auxiliary contacts, one for each contactor.5) Wiring set contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for 2 contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom.6) Wiring set contains: wiring modules on the top and bottom.7) Wiring set contains: 2 connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom.

W COMPONENTS FOR CUSTOMER ASSEMBLYFor customer assembly of reversing contactor assemblies size 6, 10 and 12, following components are available. Contactors, thermal overload relays, the mechanical interlock (as of size 0) and – for momentary-contact operation – auxiliary contact blocks for latching must be ordered separately.


Wiring set for size 6 LSZ6W002

Wiring set for size 10 LSZEW001

Wiring set for size 12 LSZ6W001

Mechanical interlock for size 6, 10, 12 LSZ6W001


Page

96

W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – FUNCTION

The operating times of the individual LSD contactors are rated in such a way that no overlapping of the contact makingand the arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing, providing they are interlocked by way of their auxiliary switches (NC contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock. For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, adead interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages ≥ 500 V. This dead times does not apply to assemblieswith DC operation. The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected by the mechanical interlock.

The following points should be noted:

Size 00• For maintained-contact operation:

Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock.• For momentary-contact operation:

Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock; in addition, an auxiliary contact block withat least one NO contact for latching is required per contactor.

Sizes 0 to 3• For maintained-contact operation:

The contactors have no auxiliary contact in the basic unit; NC contacts for the electrical interlock are therefore integratedin the mechanical interlock that can be mounted on the side of contactor (one contact each for the left and right-handcontactors).

• For momentary-contact operation:Electrical interlock as for maintained-contact operation; for the purpose of latching an auxiliary contact with an NO contact is additionally required for each contactor. This contact can be snapped onto the top of the contactors. Alternatively, auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the side can be used; they must be fitted onto the outside of each contactor.

W SURGE SUPPRESSIONSizes 00 to 3All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the coil.As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (size 00) or fitted onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (size 0 to 3).

W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The technical specifications are identical to those of the LSD .. contactors.The CSA and UL approvals only apply to the complete contactor assemblies and not to the individual parts for customerassembly.


Page

97

These LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are designed for standard applications.

Note:Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applications such as very heavy starting or wye-delta starting of special motors must be customized. Help with designing such special applications is available.

W COMPLETE UNITS UP TO SIZE 3The LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be ordered as follows:Sizes 00 to 3:• Fully wired and tested, with electrical interlock, dead interval of up to 10 s on reversing (size 00 with electrical and

mechanical interlocks)

A dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the time relay function. There is also a range of accessories(auxiliary contact blocks, surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately.

For overload relays for motor protection, see "Thermal Overload Relays”

The LSY contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mountingrails. Fully wired and tested LSY contactor assemblies have one unassigned NO contact which is mounted onto the front of theK3 delta contactor. A timing relay is mounted onto the right side of sizes 00, 0 to 2 (7,5 kW, 11 kW and 22 kW).

Rated data Size at AC 50 HZ 400 V

Rating Operational Motor Line/delta Star contactor WYE-Delta timer Order No.current Ie current contactor complete

kW A A 230 V 50/60 Hzup to 7.5 17 17 00-00-00 LSDD1213 LSDD0713 LSZD0101 LSYD1733up to 15 32 34 0-0-0 LSD02533 LSD01213 LSZD0101 LSY03233up to 22 50 43 2-2-0 LSD23233 LSD02533 LSZD0101 LSY25033

W COMPONENTS FOR CUSTOMER ASSEMBLYInstallation kits with wiring modules and, if necessary, mechanical connectors are available for contactor assemblies forwyedelta starting. Contactors, overload relays, wye-delta timers, auxiliary contacts for electrical interlock – if required alsofeeder terminals, mechanical interlocks (exception: In the case of the wiring set for size 00 contactor assemblies the mechanical interlock between the delta contactor and the star contactor is included in the kit) and base plates – must beordered separately.

The wiring sets for sizes 00 and 0 contain the top and bottom main conducting path connections between the line and deltacontactors (top) and between the delta and star contactors (bottom). In the case of sizes 2 to 12 only the bottom main con-ducting path connection between the delta and star contactors is included in the wiring module, owing to the larger conductor cross-section at the infeed.

W WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW


Wiring set for single infeed size 00 1) LSZDY001

Wiring set for single infeed size 0 2) LSZ0Y001

Wiring set for single infeed size 2 LSZ2Y004

Star jumper for size 00 LSZDY002

Star jumper for size 0 LSZ0Y002

Star jumper for size 2 LSZ2Y005

Base plate for size 2/2/0 LSZ2Y001

Y-D timer - 20s LSZD0101

Y-D timer - 60s LSZD0102

1) Wiring set contains: mechanical interlock, 3 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and wye- contactor); star jumper.

2) Wiring set contains: 5 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and wye-contactor); star jumper.


Page

98

W MOTOR PROTECTIONThermal overload relays can be used for overload protection. The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor current.

W FUNCTION

Wye-delta starting can only be used either if the motor normally operates in a Δ connection or starts softly or if the loadtorque during Y starting is low and does not increase sharply. On the Y step the motors can carry approximately 50 % (classKL 16) or 30 % (class KL 10) of their rated torque; The tightening torque is approximately 1/3 of that during direct on-linestarting. The starting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor current.

The changeover from Y to Δ must not be effected until the motor has run up to rated speed. Operating mechanisms whichrequire this changeover to be performed earlier are unsuitable for wyedelta starting.

The ratings given in the table are only applicable to motors with a starting current ratio IA ≤ 8.4 x IN and using wye-deltatiming relay with a dead interval on reversing of approximately 50 ms.

W SURGE SUPPRESSIONSizes 00 to 3:All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements, varistors or diode assemblies for damping opening surges in thecoil. As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (size 00)or fitted onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (size 0 to 3).

Sizes 6 to 12:The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard.

Rating Sizes Rated motor Thermal Setting range Permissible back-up fuses for starters,of contactors current overload relay comprising contactor assemblies and overload relays.K1-K3-K2

(the thermal overload Single or double infeed1)

relays must be set to Fuse links0.58 times the rated LV HRC LV HRC Britishmotor current)

DIAZED Operational class listed StandardNEOZED aM fuses FusesgL/gG operational class CLASS BS88

RK5/LType of coordination Type of Type of

coordination coordination"1" "2" "2" "1" "2"

kW A Type A A A A A A A5.5 00-00-00 12 LSTD0800 5.5 ... 8 35 20 10 30 35 207.5 00-00-00 16 LSTD1000 7 ... 10 35 20 16 40 35 2011 0-0-0 22 LST01600 11 ... 16 63 25 20 60 63 2515 0-0-0 29 LST02000 14 ... 20 100 35 20 80 100 3518.5 0-0-0 35 LST02500 20 ... 25 100 35 20 100 100 3522 2-2-0 41 LST23200 22 ... 32 125 63 35 125 125 63

1) The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.

W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSShort-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V.For Thermal overload relays see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays.

W WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES – OVERVIEW


Page

99

Starter Type LSY.. .. LSYD LSY0 LSY2Sizes 00-00-00 0-0-0 2-2-0

All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the individual LSD contactors and LST thermal overload relays Utilization category DC-1 Operat- 3 million

ing cycles

Short-circuit protection without overload relay 1)

Maximum rated current of the fuseMain circuit Fuse links, gL/gGLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZEDSingle or double infeed- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination „1“ A 35 100 125EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination „2“ A 20 35 63Control circuitFuse links, gL/g A 10GDIAZED, NEOZED A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the Thermal overload relay is connected

in the contactor coil circuit(short-circuit current Ik ≤1 kA)Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10

A 62), if the auxiliary contact of the Thermal overload relay is connected in the contactor coil circuit

Size of individual contactors K1 line contactor Type LSD ...D12 ...025 ...232K3 delta contactor Type LSD ...D12 ...025 ...232K2 star contactor Type LSD ...D07 ...012 ...025

Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contactors 3)

Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s Rated operational current Ie at 400 V A 17 40 65

500 V A 11.3 31.2 55.4690 V A 9 22.5 53.7

Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 12 20.450 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 21 35

500 V kW 6.9 20.5 38690 V kW 7.5 20.4 51

1000 V kW -- -- --Switching frequency with overload relay h-1 15 15 15Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 15 s Rated operational current Ie at 400 V A 17 31 44

500 V A 11.3 31 44690 V A 9 22.5 44

Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 9.4 13.850 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 16.3 24

500 V kW 6.9 20.4 30690 V kW 7.5 20.4 42

1000 V kW -- -- --Switching frequency with overload relay h-1 15 15 15Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 20 s Rated operational current Ie at 400 V A 17 28 39

500 V A 11.3 28 39690 V A 9 22.5 39

Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 8.5 12.250 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 14.7 21.3

500 V kW 6.9 18.4 26.7690 V kW 7.5 20.4 37

1000 V kW -- -- --Switching frequency with Thermal overload relay h-1 15 15 15

1) Short-circuit protection with overload relays, see Thermal Overload Relays.2) Up to Ik < 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V.

W LSY COMPLETE UNITS, 3 ... 22 kW

DIMENSIONS

Page

10057

,5

5,3 8,6

51

5

5

67

99106

2)

15,5

118 3)

67

45

5)

95

35

50

5

4)

35

50

5

4)

W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE

W LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00Screw terminals with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and mounted thermal overload relay.

Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.

2) Auxiliary contact block3) Surge suppressor4) Drilling pattern5) Auxiliary contact block 1-pole

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

�

��

��

�

�

W LSD0 CONTACTORS AND LSSO CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 0Screw terminals with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and mounted thermal overload relay.

Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.

For size 0:a = 3 mm at < 240 Va = 7 mm at > 240 Vb = DC 10 mm deeper than AC1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front,

1- and 4-pole 3) Surge suppressor4) Drilling pattern

��

��

��

� ��

�

��

��

W LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00With surge suppressor.

Deviating dimensions for auxiliary contactors with Cage Clamp terminals (on request): Height: 60 mm.

3) Surge suppressor4) Drilling pattern

DIMENSIONS

Page

101

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

For size S3:

a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembland < 240 V

a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 Va = 17 mm with RC elementb = DC 13 mm deeper than AC1) Auxiliary switch block, laterally moun2) Auxiliary switch block, mountable on

front (1-, 2- and 4-pole), same dimenfor versions with screw or Cage Clamminals

3)

W LSD3 CONTACTORS, SIZE 3Screw terminals with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and mounted thermal overload relay.

For size 3:a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembly and < 240 Va = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 Va = 17 mm with RC elementb = DC 13 mm deeper than AC1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front

(1- and 4-pole), same dimensions for versions with screw or Cage Clamp terminals

3) Surge suppressor4) Drilling pattern5) For mounting on TH 35 standard mounting rail according

to EN 60715 (15 mm deep) or TH 75 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715

6) Allen screw 4 mm

��

�

��

��

�

��

�

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

For size S2:

a = 0 mm with varisa = 3.5 mm with vaa = 17 mm with RCb = DC 15 mm dee1) Auxiliary switch b2) Auxiliary switch b

(1-, 2- and 4-pole3) Surge suppresso4) Drilling pattern

W LSD2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2Screw terminals with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and mounted thermal overload relay.

For size 2:a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode assemblya = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 Va = 17 mm with RC elementb = DC 15 mm deeper than AC1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front,

1- and 4-pole 3) Surge suppressor4) Drilling pattern

DIMENSIONS

Page

102

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

��

�

��

Drilling pattern

For size

k = 120withd

1) 2nd a2) Auxili3) RC el4) 3RB25) 3RT19

(Allen6) 3RT19

W LSD6 CONTACTORS, SIZE 6With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block box terminals.

Distance from grounded parts: Lateral: 10 mm, Front: 20 mm

For size 6:k = 120 mm (minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil)1) 2nd auxiliary contact block, lateral2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front3) RC element5) Box terminals

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

�

Drilling pattern

W LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZE 10With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block box terminals.


For size 10:k = 150 mm (minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil)1) 2nd auxiliary contact block, lateral2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front3) RC element5) Box terminals

5)

5)

DIMENSIONS

Page

103

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

For sizes S10 and S12

k = 150 mm (minimum withdrawable coil)

1) 2nd auxiliary switch b2) Auxiliary switch block3) RC element4) 3RB20 overload relay5) Box terminal block (A6) PLC connection 24 V

Drilling pattern

W LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZE 12With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block.


For size 12:k = 150 mm (minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil)1) 2nd auxiliary contact block, lateral2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front3) RC element

W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

� �

��

�

��

��

��

DetailA = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts

�

��

DetailA = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts

��

W LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

W LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14

1) With box terminals for laminated copper bars (on request).Terminal cover for touch protection see page 32 LSZHD001.

DIMENSIONS

Page

104

W LSR CONTACTORS, 4-POLE

W LSRD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00Screw terminals with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.

For size 00:Deviating dimensions for contactors with Cage Clamp terminals:Height: 60 mmMounting depth with auxiliary contact block: 110 mm2) Auxiliary contact block 3) Surge suppressor4) Drilling pattern5) Auxiliary contact block 1-pole

W LSR0 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0Screw terminals with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.

For size 0:a = 3 mm at < 250 V

and mounting of surge suppressora = 7 mm at > 250 V

and mounting of surge suppressorb = DC 10 mm deeper than AC1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable (left)2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front3) Surge suppressor4) Drilling pattern


For sizes 2 and 3:a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 Va = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 Va = 17 mm with RC element and diode assemblyb = Size 2: DC 15 mm deeper than AC

Size 3: DC 13 mm deeper than AC1) Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable

(right or left)2) Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front,

(1- and 4-pole)3) Surge suppressor4) Drilling pattern5) For mounting on TH 35 standard mounting rail

according to EN 60715 (15 mm deep) or for size 3 also to TH 75 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715

6) Allen screw 4 mm


DIMENSIONS

Page

105

W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00Screw terminals for surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.

1) Auxiliary contact block 2) Surge suppressor3) Drilling pattern

W LSHD...N, LSHD...G AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00Screw terminals with diode built-in or additional surge suppressor. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.

All types: no further auxiliary contacts or contact blocks can be snapped on.

LSHD...N: surge suppressor can be inserted

LSHD...G: with built-in diode

Deviating dimensions for auxiliary contactorswith Cage Clamp terminals:Height: 60 mm1) Surge suppressor2) Drilling pattern

DIMENSIONS

Page

1061 3

5

101

5

5

105

5

51

35

50

W LSK CAPACITOR CONTACTORS

W LSKD CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 00

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

�

� �

� �

� �

� � �

��

� �

Drillingpattern

W LSK0 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0

5190

116170

8

57

183

130

167

22,522,5

70

150

124

104

3818

60

130 Drilling

pattern

W LSK3 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 3

DIMENSIONS

Page

107

W LA3K CAPACITY SWITCHING CONTACTORS

W LA3K18..

W LA3K24.., LA3K32..

W LA3K50.., LA3K62.., LA3K74..

W LA3K90.., LA3K11..

LA3K74..

DIMENSIONS

Page

108��

��

��

��

��

W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTORS

W LSZDD003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 003-pole, with terminal

��

��

��

��

W LSZDD004 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 004-pole, with terminal

��

��

��

�

��

W LSZ2D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 2

��

��

��

�

��

��

W LSZ3D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 3

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

�

W LSZ0D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 03-pole, with terminal

22,5 84 7

48

W LSZ00113 MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

W LSZ2D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 03-pole, with terminal

DIMENSIONS

Page

109�

� �

� �

��

��

W LSZDD2.., LSZDH5..*AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00according to EN 50012 and *EN 50005

Screw terminals, 1- to 4-pole

��

��

��

��

W LSZD0501, LSZD0510 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00according to EN 50005

Screw terminals, cable entry from below, 1-pole

��

��

��

��

��

W LSZ0D1.., LSZ0D1..F*AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12according to EN 50012 and *EN 50005

Screw terminals, 4-pole

��

��

�

W LSZ0D711, LSZ3D811*AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 (*3) TO 12according to EN 50012, laterally mountable,


��

��

��

��

W LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12according to EN 50012 and EN 50005


��

W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

W LSZ6W001 MECHANICAL INTERLOCK, SIZES 6 TO 12

��

��

��

��

DIMENSIONS

Page

110

� ��

��

�

�

��

�

��

W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

W LSWD, SIZE 00with or without LSZDW002 mechanical interlock link

��

�

��

� ��

��

��

�

��

��

��

W LSW0, SIZE 0with LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��


�

��

�

��

�

��

�

� ��

�

��

��


DIMENSIONS

Page

111

W LSY CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

W LSYD, SIZES 00 – 00 – 00

�

��

��105135

��

� ��

��

��

��

W LSY0, SIZES 0 – 0 – 0

��

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

W LSY2, SIZES 2 – 2 – 0

K1

SCHEMATICS

Page

112

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES

� � � � � �

� ��

� � �

� �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� ��

� � �

� ��

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

W LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00Terminal designations according to EN 50012

LSDD, LSSD contactors LSDD, LSSD contactors

1NO included 1NC included


LSKD contactor LSK0, LSK3 contactor

Size 00 Sizes 0, 3

W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3, LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 12Terminal designations according to EN 50012

LSD0, LSS0, LSD2, LSD3 LSD6, LSDE, LSDG

contactors contactors

LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors 2NO + 2NC

with front mounted 4-pole LSZ0D122 auxiliary contact block

or with lateral 2-pole LSZ0D711 auxiliary contact block

� � � � � �

� ��

�

�

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14Terminal designations according to EN 50012

4 NO + 4 NC

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

� �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

W LSR0, LSR2, LSR3 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3Terminal designations according to EN 50005

4NO

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

� �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

W LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00Terminal designations according to EN 50005

4NO

LSZD.... auxiliary contact blocksaccording to EN 50005 and EN 50012 can be snapped on

LSZ0.... auxiliary contact blocksaccording to EN 50005 and EN 50012 can be snapped on

SCHEMATICS

Page

113


W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (no auxiliary contacts can be snapped on), surge suppressor can be pluged in

LSHD067N LSHD068N LSHD069N

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (no auxiliary contacts can be snapped on), diode integrated

LSHD067G LSHD068G LSHD069G

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00Terminal designations according to EN 500111)

LSHD067. LSHD068. LSHD069.

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 1) Positively-driven operation isassured likewise for auxiliarycontact blocks according to EN50005 in conjunction with LSHauxiliary contactors.

W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NC INCLUDED AND FOR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00 Terminal designations according to EN 50005

LSZD auxiliary contact blocks, 4-pole

for snapping onto the front

LSZDH540

4NO

LSZDH531

3NO + 1NC

LSZD auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole

for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below

LSZD0510

1NO

LSZD0501

1NC

W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO INCLUDED, SIZE 00 LSZD auxiliary contact blocks 1 to 4-pole, for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012

LSZDH522

2NO + 2NC

LSZDD201 LSZDD213LSZDD212 LSZDD222

SCHEMATICS

Page

114


� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

LSZ0D131

3NO + 1NC

LSZ0D122

2NO + 2NC

LSZ0D113

1NO + 3NC

LSZ0D140F

4NO

LSZ0D131F

3NO + 1NC

LSZ0D122F

2NO + 2NC

LSZ0D104F

4NC

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

LSZ0D711

1NO + 1NC

mounted left

LSZ0D711

1NO + 1NC

mounted right

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

LSZ3D811

1NO + 1NC

mounted left

LSZ3D811

1NO + 1NC

mounted right

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12Terminal designations according to EN 50012, for snapping onto the front

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12Terminal designations according to EN 50005, for snapping onto the front

W FIRST LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12Terminal designations according to EN 50012

W SECOND LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2-POLE, ONLY FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 3 TO 12 Terminal designations according to EN 50012

W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12Terminal designations according to EN 50005

LSZ0D0 auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole

for snapping onto the front

LSZ0D010

1NO

LSZ0D001

1NC

LSZ0D9.. auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole

early make and delayed, for snapping onto the front

LSZ0D910

1NO

early make

LSZ0D901

1NC

delayed

Diode Diode assembly Varistor RC element

�

W SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (CODED PLUG-IN DIRECTION)

SCHEMATICS

Page

115

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES

��

��

� � � ��

� � � ��

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

� �

� �

W LSDD, LSSD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00Terminal designations according to EN 50012

1NO included 1NC included

��

��

� � �

� � �

�

�

� � �

� � �

��

��

W LSD0, LSS0, LSD2, LSD3 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12Terminal designations according to EN 50012

W LSD6, LSDE, LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 6 TO 12Terminal designations according to EN 50012, with laterally included auxiliary contact block LSZ0D711 (2 NO + 2 NC).

Can be extended by LSZ3D811 to 4 NO + 4 NC.

2NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14Terminal designations according to EN 50012

4 NO + 4 NC

SCHEMATICS

Page

116

W LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00Terminal designations according to EN 50005

4 NO

��

��

� �

� � �

�

W LSR0, LSR2, LSR3 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3Terminal designations according to EN 50005

4 NO

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

��


W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS, SIZES 00 TO 3

LSKD contactor

Size 00

� �

� ��

� �

� �

� � � � � A1

A2

1 3 5

2 4 6

43

44

A2

A1

LSK0, LSK3 contactor

Sizes 0, 3

��

��

��

��

��

��

W LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00Terminal designations according to EN 50011

LSHD067. LSHD068. LSHD069.

4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC

SCHEMATICS

Page

117

W LSZDH5.., LSZD05.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NC CONTACT OR LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO CONTACT

W LSZDD2.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1 TO 4-POLE, SIZE 00for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012

LSZDD201 LSZDD212

1NC 1NO + 2NC

LSZDD213 LSZDD222

1NO + 3NC 2NO + 2NC

W LSZDH5.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 00for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50005

LSZDH540

4 NO

54 84

53 63 73 83

64 74 54 62

53 8361 73

74 84

LSZDH531

3NO + 1NC

54 84

53 8361 71

62 72

LSZDH522

2NO + 2NC

W LSZD05.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1-POLE, SIZE 00for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below, terminal designations according to EN 50005

LSZD0510

1 NO

� � � � � � � �

LSZD0501

1NC

21

22

21 31 43

22 32 44

21 31 41 53

22 32 42 54

21 31 41 53

22 32 42 54

W LSZ0D1.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 0 TO 12for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012

LSZ0D122

2NO + 2NCLSZ0D131

3NO + 1NCLSZ0D113

1NO + 3NC

W LSZ0D1.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SIZE 0 TO 12for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50005

LSZ0D140F

4 NO

LSZ0D131F

3NO + 1NCLSZ0D122F

2NO + 2NC

LSZ0D104F

4NC

��

��

��

��

13 23 33 43

14 24 34 44

��

��

��

��

13 21 33 43

14 22 34 44

��

��

��

��

13 21 31 41

14 22 32 44

��

��

��

��

13 21 31 41

14 22 32 42

��

��

��

��

13 23 33 41

14 24 34 42

��

��

��

��

13 23 31 41

14 24 32 42

��

��

��

��

11 21 31 41

12 22 32 42

SCHEMATICS

Page

118


W LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1-POLE, SIZES 0 TO 12for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012

LSZ0D010

1 NO

��

��

��

��

LSZ0D001

1NC

LSZ0D910

1 NO

early make

��

��

�

�

LSZ0D901

1NC

delayed

W LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 2-POLE, SIZES 0 (3) TO 12Terminal designations according to EN 50012

LSZ0D711

First laterally mountable, left or right

1NO + 1NC

Left Right

LSZ3D811

Second laterally mountable, left or right (only for sizes 3 to 12)

1NO + 1NC

Left Right

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

111

112

121

122

1 3

2 4 6

K1

5 1 3

2 4 6

K2

5

K1

K2

111

112

122

121

W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZES 0 TO 3Terminal designations according to EN 50005. LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock (laterally mountable), integrated in reversing

contactor assemblies (reversing starters), contains 2 NC contacts for the electrical interlock, one for each contactor.

2 NC

SCHEMATICS

Page

119

W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

L1L2L3

F2

K1K2

M3~

WVU

F1

W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZE 00The LSZDW001 wiring set contains, among other things,

wiring connectors for connecting the main circuit.

L1/L+

S0

S1 K1

K1N/L

F3

53

54

A1

A2

21

22

A121

22

K253

54

S2

S2 S1

F296

95

K2 K1

K2A2

L1/L+

S

K1N/L

F3

A1

A2

21

22

A121

22

F296

95

K2 K1

K2A2

10 2

W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZE 00(The terminal designations for the contactors comply with

EN 50012). The LSZDW001 wiring set contains, among

other things, the electrical interlock.

For momentary-contact For maintained-contact

operation operation

L1L2L3

F2

K1K2

M3~

WVU

F1

W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 3The LSZ.W001 wiring set contains, among other things, the

wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the

main current paths.

L1/L+

S0

S1 K1

K1N/L

F3

.3

.4

A1

A2

111

112

A1122

121

K2.3

.4

S2

S2 S1

F296

95

K2 K1

K2A2

L1/L+

S

K1N/L

F3

A1

A2

111

112

A1122

121

F296

95

K2 K1

K2A2

10 2

W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 3(The terminal designations for the contactors comply with

EN 50005). The LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock contains

2 NC contact, one for each contactor interlock.


operation operation

S0 Button "OFF"S1 Button "Clockwise ON"S2 Button "Counterclockwise ON"S Button "CW-OFF-CCW"K1 Clockwise contactorK2 Counterclockwise contactorF1 Fuses for main circuitF3 Fuses for control circuitF2 Thermal overload relays

SCHEMATICS

Page

120

W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSY WYE-DELTA STARTING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

L1L2L3

F1

K1 K3

M3~

U1V1W1

F0

K21 3 5

2 4 6

W2U2V2

1 3 5

2 4 6

MU1V1W1

W2U2V2

3AC 50Hz ...V

3~

W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 6

� �

� ��

� �

�

� �

� � � � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� � � � � � � � � � � �

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� �

� �

� �

� ��

�

� �

� � � � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� � � � � � � � � � � �

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� �

� �

�

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

W CONTROL CIRCUIT, SIZES 0 TO 12with LSZD0101 Y-Delta timer, laterally mounted (example

circuits). The contact element K4:17/18 is only closed in the

wye stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage

as well as in the de-energized state. S1 (S) is connected

to clamping point K1:33.


operation operation

L1L2L3

F1

K1 K3

M3~

U1V1W1

F0

K21 3 5

2 4 6

W2U2V2

1 3 5

2 4 6

MU1V1W1

W2U2V2

3AC 50Hz ...V

3~

F0

W MAIN CIRCUIT, SIZES 6 TO 12

S0 Button "OFF"S1 Button "ON"S Maintained-contact switchK1 Line contactorK2 Star contactorK3 Delta contactorK4 Solid-state, time-delay auxiliary contact block or timing relayF0 FusesF1 Thermal overload relays

* Clamping point K1:44 remains unwired in this version

*

SCHEMATICS

Page

121��

� � � � � �

� �

�

��

��

��

��

��

� �

� �

��

��

� � � � � �

� �

�

� �

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

� �

� �


Typical circuit diagram Typical circuit diagram

Size 00 Sizes 0 and 3


Typical circuit diagram Circuit diagram with

quick discharge resistors

W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS

BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS

Page

122BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR, AC1, 1-POLE

BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR, AC1, 2-POLE

TOP-TECHNIC

TOP-TECHNIC

BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR, AC1, 4-POLE

TOP-TECHNIC


Page

123


w CONTENTS



DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 129

SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 130

MODULAR CONTACTORS

Page

124

DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK TYPE ORDER NO.

1-POLE, 1 MODULE = 17,5 mm

Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60Hz R20–10 230 BZ326471

2-POLE, 1 MODULE = 17,5 mm





Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 1NO+1NC AC24V 50/60Hz R20–11 24 BZ326421




Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 2NC AC230V 50/60Hz R20–02 230 BZ326439



4-POLE, 2 MODULES = 35 mm


















BZ326471 BZ326453 BZ326463

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOAD, AC OPERATED

W SCHRACK-INFO• 1 Module = 17,5 mm

• Auxiliary contact block

see next page

MODULAR CONTACTORS

Page

125

DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK TYPE ORDER NO.

Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 4NO AC230V 50/60Hz K1R40 230 BZ326441

BZ326441

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR 4-POLE, SOLENOID OPERATED, SEALABLE

W SCHRACK-INFO• Width = 45 mm

• No auxiliary contacts possible

DESCRIPTION TYPE ORDER NO.

Auxiliary contact block AC15: 3A, 1NO+1NC RH11 BZ326470

BZ326470

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFO• 2-pole

• 0,5 Module = 8,8 mm

• Max. 1 RH11 for 1 contactor


Page

126

Lamp Type Power Current Capacitors Max. lamps per pole at 230V 50Hz and max. 60°CW A µF R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R..

Incandescent lamps 60 0,27 - 22 28 58 85 28100 0,45 - 13 17 35 51 17

200 0,91 - 7 8 17 25 8

300 1,36 - 4 5 11 16 5

500 2,27 - 3 3 7 10 3

1000 4,5 - 1 1 3 5 1

Fluorescent lamps 11 0,16 - 60 75 210 310 60

uncompensated or serial compensated 18 0,37 2,7 25 30 90 140 25

24 0,35 2,5 25 30 90 140 25

36 0,43 3,4 20 25 70 140 20

58 0,67 5,3 14 17 45 70 14

65 0,67 5,3 13 16 40 65 13

85 0,8 - 11 14 35 60 11

Fluorescent lamps 11 0,07 - 2 x 100 2 x 110 2 x 220 2 x 250 2 x 100

dual-connection 18 0,11 - 2 x 50 2 x 55 2 x 130 2 x 200 2 x 50

24 0,14 - 2 x 40 2 x 44 2 x 110 2 x 160 2 x 40

36 0,22 - 2 x 30 2 x 33 2 x 70 2 x 100 2 x 30

58 0,35 - 2 x 20 2 x 22 2 x 45 2 x 70 2 x 20

65 0,35 - 2 x 15 2 x 16 2 x 40 2 x 60 2 x 15

85 0,47 - 2 x 10 2 x 11 2 x 30 2 x 40 2 x 10

Fluorescent lamps 11 0,16 2,0 30 30 100 140 30

parallel compensated 18 0,37 2,0 20 20 70 90 20

24 0,35 3,0 15 15 55 75 15

36 0,43 4,5 10 10 38 51 10

58 0,67 7,0 6 6 25 30 6

65 0,67 7,0 5 5 24 28 5

85 0,8 8,0 4 4 18 23 4

Fluorescent lamps 18 0,09 - 40 40 100 150 40

with serial electronic 36 0,16 - 20 20 50 75 20

58 0,25 - 15 15 30 55 15

2 x 18 0,17 - 2 x 20 2 x 20 2 x 50 2 x 60 2 x 20

2 x 36 0,32 - 2 x 10 2 x 10 2 x 25 2 x 30 2 x 10

2 x 58 0,49 - 2 x 7 2 x 7 2 x 15 2 x 20 2 x 7

Transformers 20 - - 40 52 110 174 40

for metal halid low voltage lamps 50 - - 20 24 50 80 20

75 - - 13 16 35 54 13

100 - - 10 12 27 43 10

150 - - 7 9 19 29 7

200 - - 5 5 14 23 5

300 - - 3 4 9 14 3

Mercury-vapour lamps 50 0,61 - 16 18 38 55 16

(high-pressure lamps), uncompensated 80 0,8 - 12 14 28 40 12

e. g. HQL, HPL 125 1,15 - 8 9 20 28 8

250 2,15 - 4 5 11 15 4

400 3,25 - 3 4 7 10 3

700 5,4 - 1 2 4 6 1

1000 7,5 - 1 1 3 4 1

Mercury-vapour lamps 50 0,28 7 7 7 32 46 7

(high-pressure lamps), compensated 80 0,41 8 5 5 25 35 5

e. g. HQL, HPL 125 0,65 10 3 3 16 22 3

250 1,22 18 2 2 8 12 2

400 1,95 25 1 1 5 7 1

700 3,45 45 1 1 3 4 1

1000 4,8 60 - - 2 3 -

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R..acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1


Page

127

Lamp Type Power Current Capacitors Max. lamps per pole at 230V 50Hz and max. 60°CW A µF R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R..

Metal halide lamps 35 0,53 - 22 24 45 65 22uncompensated 70 1 - 12 14 24 35 12e. g. HQI, HPI, CDM 150 1,8 - 6 8 13 18 6

250 3 - 4 5 8 12 4400 3,5 - 3 4 6 10 31000 9,5 - 1 1 2 4 12000 16,5 - - - 1 2 -

400V per pole 2000 10,5 - - - 1 2 -3500 18 - - - - 1 -

Metal halide lamps 35 0,25 6 8 8 38 50 8compensated 70 0,45 12 4 4 20 28 4e. g. HQI, HPI, CDM 150 0,75 20 2 2 12 17 2

250 1,5 33 1 1 7 10 1400 2,1 35 1 1 5 7 11000 5,8 95 - - 2 3 -2000 11,5 148 - - 1 1 -

400V pro Pol 2000 6,6 58 - - 1 2 -3500 11,6 100 - - - 1 -

Metal halide lamps 20 0,1 integrated 9 9 18 20 9with serial electronic 35 0,2 integrated 6 6 11 13 6(e. g.: PCI) 70 0,36 integrated 5 5 10 12 550-125 x In lamp for 0,6ms 150 0,7 integrated 4 4 8 10 4Sodium-vapour lamps 35 1,5 - 7 9 22 30 7(low pressure lamps), uncompensated 55 1,5 - 7 9 22 30 7

90 2,4 - 4 6 13 19 4135 3,5 - 3 4 10 13 3150 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3180 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3200 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3

Sodium-vapour lamps 35 0,31 20 3 3 12 16 3(low pressure lamps), compensated 55 0,42 20 2 2 8 14 2

90 0,63 30 1 1 5 9 1135 0,94 45 1 1 3 6 1150 1 40 1 1 3 6 1180 1,16 40 1 1 2 5 1200 1,32 25 - - 2 4 -

Sodium-vapour lamps 150 1,8 - 5 6 11 22 5(high pressure lamps), uncompensated 250 3 - 4 5 7 13 4

330 3,7 - 3 4 6 10 3400 4,7 - 2 2 5 8 21000 10,3 - 1 1 2 4 1

Sodium-vapour lamps 150 0,83 20 2 2 7 14 2(high pressure lamps), compensated 250 1,5 33 1 1 4 8 1

330 2 40 1 1 3 6 1400 2,4 48 1 1 2 5 11000 6,3 106 - - 1 2 -

Sodium-vapour lamps 20 0,1 integrated 9 9 18 20 9(high pressure lamps) with serial electronic 35 0,2 integrated 6 6 11 13 6(e. g.: PCI) 70 0,36 integrated 5 5 10 12 550-125 x In lamp for 0,6ms 150 0,7 integrated 4 4 8 10 4

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R..acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1


Page

128

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R.., RH11acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1

Contactor Type R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R.. RH11Main contacts

Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 440 2) 440 2) 440 2) 440 2) 690 1) 440 2)

Rated operation voltage Ue V AC 250 440 440 440 690 440

Frequency of operations AC1, AC3 1/h 300 300 600 600 600 600

Mechanical life S x 106 1 1 1 1 5 1

Utilization category AC1

Rated operational current Ie (= Ith) open at 60°C A 20 25 40 63 20 -

Contact life S x 106 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,2 -

Minimum switch voltage V/mA 24/100 24/100 24/100 24/100 24/100 1 7/5

Short time current 10s-current A 72 72 216 240 96 -

Power loss per pole at Ie/AC1 W 2 2 3 7 1 0,5


Switching of three-phase motors, rated operational current Ie A - 9 27 30 12 -

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220V kW - 2,2 7,5 8 3 -

50-60Hz 230-240V kW 1,1 4) 2,5 8 8,5 3 -

380-415V kW - 4 12,5 15 4 -

Contact life S x 106 - 0,15 0,15 0,15 0,9 -

Power consumption of coils

AC operated inrush VA 7-9 14-18 33-45 33-45 3-3,5 -

sealed VA 2,2-4,2 4,4-8,4 7-10 7-10 3-3,5 -

W 0,8-1,6 1,6-3,2 2,6-3 2,6-3 3-3,5 -

Operation range of coils in multiples of control voltage Us (-40 to +40°C) 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 -

Short circuit protection

Coordination-type "1"

according to IEC 947-4-1, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 35 35 63 80 40 -

Cable cross-sections

Main connector solid or stranded mm² 1,5-10 1,5-10 2,5-25 2,5-25 0,5-2,5 3) 0,5-2,5 3)

flexible mm² 1,5-6 1,5-6 2,5-16 2,5-16 0,5-2,5 3) 0,5-2,5 3)

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 1,5-6 1,5-6 2,5-16 2,5-16 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5

Clamps per pole 1 1 1 1 2 2

Magnetic coil solid or stranded mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,5-2,5 3) -

flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 3) -

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 -

Clamps per pole 1 1 1 1 2 -

Auxiliary Contacts

Rated insulation voltage Ui1) V AC - - - - - 440 2)

Thermal rated current Ith 40°C A - - - - - 10

Ambient temperature 60°C A - - - - - 6


Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A - - - - - 3

380-415V A - - - - - 2

440V A - - - - - 1,6

Utilization category DC13

Rated operational current Ie 24-60V A - - - - - 2

110V A - - - - - 0,4

per pole 220V A - - - - - 0,1


Short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted

max. fuse size gL (gG) A - - - - - 10

Switching time

At control voltage Us ±10% make time ms 7-16 9-15 11-15 11-15 15-19 -

release time ms 6-12 4-8 6-13 6-13 8-25 -

arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 -

1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. 3) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor 2) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 4kV. 4) AC5b motor 2-pole 230V 1,1kW

DIMENSIONS

Page

129

W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40, RH11

W 1 MODULE W 2 MODULES

W 3 MODULES

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKBZ326470

W MODULAR CONTACTOR, SOLENOID OPERATED BZ326441

SCHEMATICS

Page

130

W CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR BZ TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40

W 1-POLE, 1 MODULE R20-10 230

W CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK

W 2-POLE, 0,5 MODULE RH11

W 2-POLE, 1 MODULE R20-20 24 R20-20 230

R20-11 24R20-11 230

R20-02 230R25-02 24R25-02 230

W 3-POLE, 3 MODULES R40-30 230

W 4-POLE, 2 MODULES R25-40 24R25-40 230

R25-31 24R25-31 230

R25-13 24R25-13 230

R25-04 24

W 4-POLE, 3 MODULES R40-40 24R40-40 230 R40-22 230

W 4-POLE K1R40 230

R63-40 24R63-40 230 R63-31 230

(21)

(22)

R63-04 230(21)

(22)

(13)

(14)

SCHEMATICS

Page

131

W TYPES R20.., R25.. – 1-POLE, 1 MODULE

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR BZ TYPES R.., K1R40 AND AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK RH11

1NO

��

��

1

2

A2

A1

43

3132

44

W TYPE K1R40 – 4-POLE, (WIDTH = 45 mm)

4NO

W TYPE RH11 – 2-POLE, 0,5 MODULE

1NO + 1NC

W TYPES R25.. – 4-POLE, 2 MODULES

4NO1 3

2 4

5 7

6 8

W TYPES R20.., R25.. – 2-POLE, 1 MODULE

2NO1 3

2 4

A2

A1

1NO + 1NC1 R3

2 R4

A2

A1

2NCR1 R3

R2 R4

A2

A1

A2

A1

W TYPES R40.. – 3-POLE, 3 MODULES

3NO

1 3

2 4

5

6 A2

A1

1 3

2 4

5 7

6 8A2

A11 3

2 4

5 R7

6 R8A2

A11 3

2 4

R5 R7

R6 R8A2

A1R1 R3

R2 R4

R5 R7

R6 R8A2

A1

3NO + 1NC1 3

2 4

5 R7

6 R8

1NO + 3NC1 R3

2 R4

R5 R7

R6 R8

4NCR1 R3

R2 R4

R5 R7

R6 R8

W TYPES R40.., R63.. – 4-POLE, 3 MODULES

4NO 3NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC 4NC

A2

A1

A2

A1

A2

A1

LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3, 3POLE

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKSFOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

TOP-TECHNIC

TOP-TECHNIC

SURGE SUPPRESSORSFOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS

TOP-TECHNIC

LA MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

Page

133

LA MINIATUR POWER ANDAUXILIARY CONTACTORS

w CONTENTS



DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 139

SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 140

MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

Page

134


TYPE LA1

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50/60Hz LA100910

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NC 1) AC24V 50/60Hz LA100920

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA100913

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NC 1) AC220-240V 50Hz LA100923

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LA100915

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NC 1) DC24V LA100925

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V 2) LA10091B

1) Additional auxiliary contact blocks for contactors with 1NC included: only LA190153, 154, 155, 156 to be used (for miniatur auxiliary contactors)2) With integrated coil-protection: diode + Z-diode

LA100910

W LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE


TYPE LA1

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V AC220-240V 50Hz LA100943

Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V DC24V 2) LA10094B

2) With integrated coil-protection: diode + Z-diode

LA100943

W LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 4POLE


Auxiliary contact block 2NO+2NC DIN EN 50012 LA190150


LA190150

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contact blocks for LA1 miniatur power contactors with 1 NO included.

For LA1 miniatur power contactors with 1 NC included, see next page.

MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

Page

135


TYPE LA1

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC24V 50/60Hz LA100770

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA100773

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC380-400V 50Hz LA100774

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC24V 50/60Hz LA100780

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA100783

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC24V 50/60Hz LA100790

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA100793

Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC24V LA100795

LA100770

W LA1 MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE




Auxiliary contact block 2NC DIN EN 50011 LA190155

Auxiliary contact block 4NO DIN EN 50011 LA190156

LA190156

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS


RC-Unit 250-415VAC 50Hz LA190194

LA190194

W SURGE SUPPRESSOR FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS

W SCHRACK-INFOAuxiliary contact blocks for all LA1 miniatur auxiliary contactors and also for LA1 miniatur

power contactors with 1 NC included.


Page

136

W MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009..acc. to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1

Contactor Type LA1009..Main contacts

Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 1)

Making capacity Ieff at Ue = 690V AC A 165

Breaking capacity Ieff 400V AC A 100

cosϕ = 0,65 500V AC A 90690V AC A 80


Switching of resistive load

Rated operational current Ie (= Ith) open at 40°C A 20

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 230V kW 7,9

50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 8,3

400V kW 13,8

415V kW 14,3

Minimum cross-section of conductor at load with Ie (= Ith) mm² 2,5

Utilization category AC2 and AC3

Switching of three-phase motors

Rated operational current Ie 220V A 12

open and enclosed 230V A 11,5

240V A 11

380-400V A 9

415-440V A 8

500V A 7

660-690V A 5

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3

50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4

500-690V kW 4


Switching of squirrel cage motors, inching


open and enclosed 230V A 11,5

240V A 11

380-400V A 9

415-440V A 8

500V A 7

660-690V A 5

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3

50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4

500-690V kW 4

1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.


Page

137

W MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009..acc. to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1

Contactor Type LA1009..Utilization category DC1

Switching of resistive load 1 pole 24V A 20

Time constant L/R ≤1ms 60V A 20


220V A 0,6

3 poles in series 24V A 20

60V A 20

110V A 20

220V A 16

Utilization category DC3 and DC5

Switching of of shunt motors 1 pole 24V A 20

and series motors 60V A 5

Time constant L/R ≤1ms 110V A 1

Rated operational current Ie 220V A 0,15

3 poles in series 24V A 20

60V A 20

110V A 20

220V A 2

Maximum ambient temperature

Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90)

enclosed °C -40 to +40

with thermal overload relay open °C -25 to +60

enclosed °C -25 to +40

Storage °C -50 to +90

Short circuit protection for contactors without thermal overload relay

Coordination-type "1" according to IEC 947-4-1

Contact welding without hazard of persons, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 40

Coordination-type "2" according to IEC 947-4-1

Light contact welding accepted, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25

Contact welding not accepted

max. fuse size gL (gG) A 10

For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible

backup fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size.

Cable cross-sections for contactors without thermal overload relay

Main connector solid or stranded mm² 0,5-2,5

flexible mm² 0,5-2,5

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5

Clamps per pole 2

solid or stranded AWG 18-14

Frequency of operations

without load 1/h 10000

Contactors without thermal overload relay AC3, Ie 1/h 600

AC4, Ie 1/h 120

DC3, Ie 1/h 600

Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 5

DC operated S x 106 15

Short time current

10s-current A 96

Power loss

per pole at Ie/AC3 400V W 0,15

Resistance to shock according to IEC 68-2-27

Shock time 20ms sine-wave

AC operated NO g 5

NC g 5

DC operated NO g 8

NC g 6

1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced rated current Ie /AC1according to Ie /AC3


Page

138

W MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LA1009.., LA1007..acc. to IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-5-1

Contactor Type LA 100 7.. / LA 100 9.. AC operated LA 100 7.. / LA 100 9.. DC operatedAuxiliary contacts

Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 1) 690 1)

Thermal rated current Ith to 690V

Ambient temperature 40°C A 10 10

60°C A 6 6

Power loss

per pole at Ith W 0,5 0,5


Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 3 3

380-415V A 2 2

440V A 1,6 1,6

500V A 1,2 1,2

660-690V A 0,6 0,6


Rated operational current Ie 60V A 2 2

110V A 0,4 0,4

220V A 0,1 0,1

Maximum ambient temperature

Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90) 3) -40 to +60 (+90) 3)

enclosed °C -40 to +40 -40 to +40

Storage °C -50 to +90 -50 to +90


Short-circuit current 1kA

Contact welding not accepted, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 20 20

For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible control fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size.

Power consumption of coils

AC operated inrush VA 25 -

sealed VA 4-5 -

W 1,2 -

DC operated inrush W - 2,5

sealed W - 2,5

Operation range of coils

in multiples of control voltage Us 0,85-1,1 0,8-1,1

Switching time at control voltage Us ±10% 4) 5)

AC operated make time ms 15-25 -

release time ms 8-25 -

arc duration ms 10-15 -

DC operated make time ms - 15-19

release time ms - 8-25

arc duration ms - 10-15

Cable cross-sections

all connectors solid mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5

flexible mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5

Clamps per pole 2 2

solid or stranded AWG 18-14 18-14

1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request. 3) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced thermal rated current Ith to Ie /AC15.4) Summary switching time = release time + arc duration5) Release time of NC make time of NO increase when suppressor units for voltage peak protection are used (Varistor, RC-units, Diode units).

DIMENSIONS

Page

139

LA 100 9..LA 101 2..

W MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W CONTACTORSLA1007.., LA1009..AC and DC operated

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKLA19015.

W ACCESSORY FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W RC UNITLA190194

SCHEMATICS

Page

140

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

W 3-POLE terminal designations according to EN 50012

LA10091.1 NO included

LA10092.1 NC included


LA10094.4 NO

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS


LA10077.4 NO

LA10078.3 NO + 1 NC

LA10079.2 NO + 2 NC

W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS

LA1901502 NO + 2 NC

LA1901511 NO + 1 NC

LA1001532 NO + 2 NC

LA1901541 NO + 1 NC

LA1001552 NC

LA1901564 NO

W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NO INCLUDED terminal designations according to EN 50012

W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NC INCLUDED AND ALL AUXILIARY CONTACTORSterminal designations according to EN 50005

SCHEMATICS

Page

141

��

��

��

��

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

��

��

� � � ��

� � � ��

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

� �

� �

W 3-POLETerminal designations according to EN 50012

LA10091.1 NO included

LA10092.1 NC included

W 4-POLE Terminal designations according to EN 50005

LA10094.4 NO

7

8

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

� �

� �

13 23 33 43 A1

14 24 34 44 A2

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

� �

� �

13 21 33 43 A1

14 22 34 44 A2

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

� �

� �

13 21 31 43 A1

14 22 32 44 A2

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W 4-POLE Terminal designations according to EN 50011

LA10077.4 NO

LA10078.3 NO + 1 NC

LA10079.2 NO + 2 NC

21 31 43 53

22 32 44 54

��

��

��

��

21 33

22 34

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKSFOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NO INCLUDED front mounted auxiliary contact blocks, terminal designations according to EN 50012

LA1901502 NO + 2 NC

LA1901511 NO + 1 NC

��

��

��

��

51 61 73 83

52 62 74 84

��

��

��

��

51 63

52 64

W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WITH 1 NC INCLUDED AND ALL AUXILIARY CONTACTORSfront mounted auxiliary contact blocks, terminal designations according to EN 50005

LA1901532 NO + 2 NC

LA1901541 NO + 1 NC

��

��

��

��

51 61

52 62

LA1901552 NC

��

��

��

��

53 63 73 83

54 64 74 84

LA1901564 NO

ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

Page

142

LSTD

LST2

TOP-TECHNIC

LST3

TOP-TECHNIC

LST0




w CONTENTS

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 144




ACCESSORIES........................................................................................................ Page 156

CHARAKTERISTIC CURVES.............................................................................. Page 157

DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 158

SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 159

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – OVERVIEW

LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3

FEATURES BENEFITS LST

GENERAL DATA

SIZES • Are coordinated with the dimensions, connections and technical S00 ... S3

characteristics of the other devices in the ALEA modular system

• Permit the mounting of slim and compact load feeders in widths

of 45 mm (S00), 45 mm (S0), 55 mm (S2), 70 mm (S3)

• Simplify configuration

SEAMLESS CURRENT RANGE • Allows easy and consistent configuration with one series of

overload relays (for small to large loads) 0.11 ... 100 A

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF OVERLOAD • Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of ✓loads against excessive temperature rises due to overload

TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF PHASE UNBALANCE • Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of loads ✓against excessive temperature rises due to phase unbalance

TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF PHASE FAILURE • Minimizes heating of induction motors during phase failure ✓PROTECTION OF SINGLE-PHASE LOADS • Enables the protection of single-phase loads ✓FEATURES

RESET FUNCTION • Allows manual or automatic resetting of the relay ✓REMOTE RESET FUNCTION (ON REQUEST) • Allows the remote resetting of the relay ✓(by means of separate module)

TEST FUNCTION FOR AUXILIARY CONTACTS • Allows easy checking of the function and wiring ✓STATUS DISPLAYS • Displays the current operating state ✓LARGE CURRENT ADJUSTMENT BUTTON • Makes it easier to set the relay exactly to the correct current value ✓INTEGRATED AUXILIARY CONTACTS (1 NO + 1 NC) • Allows the load to be switched off if necessary ✓

• Can be used to signal output ✓DESIGN OF LOAD FEEDERS

SHORT-CIRCUIT STRENGTH UP TO 100 KA AT 690 V • Provides optimum protection of the loads and operating personnel ✓(in conjunction with the corresponding fuses in the event of short-circuits due to insulation faults or faulty

or the corresponding motor starter protector) switching operations

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL MATCHING • Simplifies configuration ✓TO CONTACTORS LSSD, LSDD, LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 • Reduces wiring outlay and costs ✓

• Enables stand-alone installation as well as space-saving direct mounting ✓

SPRING-LOADED TERMINAL CONNECTION • Enables fast and maintenance-free connections S00

SYSTEM FOR MAIN CIRCUIT (ON REQUEST) • Permits vibration-resistant connections

SPRING-LOADED TERMINAL CONNECTION • Enables fast and maintenance-free connections

SYSTEM FOR AUXILIARY CIRCUITS (ON REQUEST) • Permits vibration-resistant connections

OTHER FEATURES

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION • Allows the use of the relays at high temperatures without derating ✓• Prevents premature tripping ✓• Allows compact installation of the control cabinet without distance ✓

between the devices/load feeders

• Simplifies configuration ✓• Enables space to be saved in the control cabinet ✓

VERY HIGH LONG-TERM STABILITY • Provides safe protection for the loads even after years of use in ✓severe operating conditions


TYPE LSTD / LST0 / LST2 / LST3

APPLICATIONS

System protection ✓1)

Motor protection ✓Alternating current, 3-phase ✓Alternating current, 1-phase ✓DC current ✓SIZE OF CONTACTOR S00, S0, S2, S3

RATED OPERATIONAL CURRENT In

SIZE S00 up to 12A

SIZE S0 up to 25A

SIZE S2 up to 50A

SIZE S3 up to 100A

RATED OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE Ue 690/1000 VAC2)

RATED FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz

TRIP CLASS Class 10

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELEASE 0.11 ... 0.16A

up to 80 ... 100A

RATING FOR INDUCTION MOTOR AT 400 V AC 0.04 KW up to 45 KW

ACCESSORIES FOR SIZES S00 S0 S2 S3

Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Mechanical RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Cable release for RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Electrical remote RESET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Terminal covers -- -- ✓ ✓Sealable covers for setting knobs integrated integrated integrated integrated

1) The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the assigned electrical loads

(e.g. motors), feeder cable and other switching and protection devices in the respective load feeder.2) Size 3 up to 1000 V AC.

✓ Has this function or can use this accessory.

-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory.

W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – OVERVIEW

LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3


W CONNECTION

W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – GENERAL INFORMATIONS

Connection of the auxiliary circuitConnection type Screw terminals• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors

- solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4), 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 –- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)- stranded mm2 –- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 14)

Connection type Spring-loaded terminals on request for size 00• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors

- solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)- stranded mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (24 ... 16)

OVERLOAD RELAYS CURRENT MEASUREMENT CURRENT RANGE CONTACTORS (TYPE, SIZE, RATING IN kW)LSSD+LSDD/S00 LSS0+LSD0/S0 LSD2/S2 LSD3/S3

TYPE TYPE A 3/4/5.5 5.5/7.5/11 15/18.5/22 30/37/45

LSTD integrated 0.11 … 12 ✓ -- -- --LST0 integrated 1.8 … 25 -- ✓ -- --LST2 integrated 5.5 … 50 -- -- ✓ --LST3 integrated 18 … 100 -- -- -- ✓



W SCHRACK INFOThe LST thermal overload relays up to 100 A have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase failure. An overload or phase failure resultsin an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. Via heating elements, this current rise heats upthe bimetal strips inside the device which then bend and as a result trigger the auxiliary contacts by means of a trippingmechanism. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratiobetween the tripping current and set current Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic. The"tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or auto maticallyafter the recovery time has elapsed. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials.

W DESIGN AND FUNCTION

W DEVICE CONCEPTThe LST thermal overload relays are compact devices, i.e. current measurement and the evaluation unit are integrated in a single enclosure.

W MOUNTING OPTIONSThe LST thermal overload relays can be mounted directly onto the LSS/LSD contactors (exception: size 00 with Cage Clampconnection can only be installed as a stand-alone installation). The devices can also be installed as stand-alone installations with the corresponding terminal brackets.

W CONNECTION METHODAll sizes of the LST thermal overload relays with screw terminal can be connected to the auxiliary and main current paths.Rails can be connected to the main conductor connections of size 3 overload relays if the box terminals are removed.As an alternative, the devices are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. The auxiliary conductor connections of thesedevices, and for size 00 the main conductor connections as well, are fitted with Cage Clamp terminals (on request).

W OVERLOAD RELAYS IN CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTINGWhen overload relays are used in combination with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting it must be noted that only 0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor. An overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must be set to 0.58 times the motor current. An assignment of the LST thermal overload relays to the line contactors of our LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be found under "Power and Auxiliary Contactors".

W OPERATION WITH FREQUENCY CONVERTERThe LST thermal overload relays are suitable for operation with frequency converters. Depending on the frequency of theconverter, a higher current than the motor current must be used in some cases due to eddy-currents and skin effects.

(1) Connection for mounting onto contactors: Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to thecontactors and soft starters, these connecting pins can be used for direct mounting of the overload relays. Stand-alone installation is possible as an alternative (in some cases in conjunction with a stand-alone installation module).

(2) Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button: With this switch you can choose between manual and automatic RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing the RESET button. A remote RESET is possible using the RESET modules (accessories), which are independent of size (on request).

(3) Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring: Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test.(4) Motor current setting: Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large rotary knob.(5) STOP button: If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches off the contactor downstream.

The NC contact is closed again when the button is released.(6) Transparent, sealable cover Secures the motor current setting, TEST function and the selector switch for manual/

automatic RESET against adjustment.(7) Supply terminals: The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors with different cross-sections

for the main and auxiliary circuits. The auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw terminals and alternatively with spring-loaded terminals (on request).

1

2

5

7

3

4

6


W BASIC FUNCTIONSThe LST thermal overload relays are designed for:• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading• Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure

W CONTROL CIRCUITThe LST thermal overload relays do not require an additional supply voltage for operation.

W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTIONFuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit protection.

W TRIP CLASSESThe LST thermal overload relays are available for normal starting conditions with trip class 10.

W PHASE FAILURE PROTECTIONThe LST thermal overload relays are fitted with phase failure sensitivity in order to minimize temperature rises of the load in the case of a phase failure during single-phase operation.

W SETTINGThe LST thermal overload relays are set to the rated motor current by means of a rotary knob. The scale of the rotary knob is shown in ampere.

W MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC RESETAutomatic and manual reset is selected by pressing and turning the blue button (RESET button). If the button is set to manual reset, the overload relay can be reset directly by pressing the RESET button. Resetting is possible in combinationwith mechanical and electrical reset options from the range of accessories. If the blue button is set to automatic RESET,the relay is reset automatically. The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the recovery time.

W RECOVERY TIMEAfter tripping due to overload, the LST thermal overload relays require some time until the bimetal strips have cooled down. The device can only be reset after the bimetal strips have cooled down. This time (recovery time) depends on the tripping characteristics and strength of the tripping current. The recovery time allows the load to cool down after tripping due to overload.

W TEST FUNCTIONThe TEST slide can be used to check whether the operational LST thermal overload relay is working properly. Actuating the slide simulates tripping of the relay. During this simulation the NC contact (95-96) is opened and the NO contact (97-98) is closed. This tests whether the auxiliary circuit has been correctly connected to the overload relay. If the LSTthermal overload relay has been set to automatic RESET, the overload relay is automatically reset when the TEST slide isreleased. The relay must be reset with the RESET button if it has been set to manual RESET.

W STOP FUNCTIONIf the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches off the contactor downstream and thus the load. The load is switched on again when the STOP button is released.

W DISPLAY OF THE OPERATING STATEThe respective operating state of the LST thermal overload relay is displayed by means of the position of the marking on the TEST function/switch position indicator slide. After tripping due to overload or phase failure, the marking on the slideis to left on the "O" mark, otherwise it is on the "I" mark.

W AUXILIARY CONTACTSThe LST thermal overload relays are fitted with an NO contact for the "tripped" signal, and an NC contact for disconnecting the contactor.




THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY SIZE 00

Thermal overload relay 0,11...0,16 A LSTD0016








Thermal overload relay 0,7...1 A LSTD0100










Thermal overload relay 7...10 A LSTD1000

Thermal overload relay 9...12 A LSTD1200



Thermal overload relay 1,8...2,5 A LST00250


Thermal overload relay 2,8...4 A LST00400




Thermal overload relay 7...10 A LST01000

Thermal overload relay 9...12,5 A LST01250





W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 00

LSTD....


LST0....

LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS





Thermal overload relay 9...12,5 A LST21250










Overload relay thermal 18...25 A LST32500








DESCRIPTION SIZE ORDER NO.

Holder for stand-alone installation 00 LSZDTE01

Holder for stand-alone installation 0 LSZ0TE01




LST2....


LST3....

W HOLDER FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

LSZ....


W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LSTD, LST0, LST2, LST3

Type LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3Size 00 0 2 3Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm General data

Trips in the event of Overload and phase failureTrip class acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 10Phase failure sensitivity YesOverload warning NoReset and recovery• Reset options after tripping Manual, automatic and remote RESET1)

• Recovery time- for automatic RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic- for manual RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic- for remote RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic

Features• Display of operating state on device Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide• TEST function Yes• RESET button Yes• STOP button YesAmbient temperature• Storage/transport °C -55 ... +80• Operation °C -20 ... +70• Temperature compensation °C Up to 60• Permissible rated current at

- temperature inside control cabinet 60 °C % 100 (over +60 °C current reduction is not required)- temperature inside control cabinet 70 °C % 87

Repeat terminals• Coil repeat terminal Yes Not required• Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Yes Not requiredDegree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20 IP202)

Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safeShock resistance with sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 8/10Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Interference immunity• Conductor-related interference

- burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays- surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays

• Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays(corresponds to degree of severity 3)

• Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays(corresponds to degree of severity 3)

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Emitted interference EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relaysResistance to extreme climates – Air humidity % 100Dimensions See dimensional drawingsInstallation altitude above sea level m Up to 2000; above this, please enquireMounting position The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for direct mounting and

stand-alone installation. For installation in the hatched area, a setting correction of 10 % must be implemented.Stand-alone installation:

Contactor + overload relay:

Type of mounting Direct mounting3)/ Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with stand-alone stand alone holderinstallation withstand alone holder

1) Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories (on request).2) Terminal compartment: degree of protection IP00.3) The LSTD overload relay with Cage Clamp terminals can only be installed as a stand-alone installation.

� � � � � � � � � �

� �

�

� � �

�

��

� � � � � �

� �

��

� � � �

� � � � � � � ��

� �

� � � ��

� � �

��

� �

� � �


Page

152


Type LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3Size 00 0 2 3Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm Main circuit

Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 3) V 690 1000Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 8Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 1000Type of current• Direct current Yes• Alternating current Yes, frequency range up to 400 HzSet current A 0.11 ... 0.16 to 1.8 ... 2.5 to 5.5 ... 8 to 18 ... 25 to

9 ... 12 20 ... 25 40 ... 50 80 ... 100Power loss per unit (max.) W 3.9 ... 6.6 3.9 ... 6 6 ... 9 10 ... 16.5Short-circuit protection• With fuse without contactor• With fuse and contactor See "Technical specifications" (short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors

for motor feeders)Safe isolation between main and auxiliary V 500 690conducting path acc. to IEC 60947-1

Connection for main circuitConnection type Screw terminals with box terminal• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4mm• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 3 ... 4.5 4 ... 6• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.),

1 or 2 conductors- solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2)

Max. 2 x (1 ... 4)2) Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 102) )- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 35)

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2) 1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)- stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2) 2 x (1 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (0.75 ... 25) 2 x (10 ... 50)

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)Max. 2 x (1 ... 4)2) Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 10)2)

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3) 2 x (10 ... 1/0)1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)

- ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)Busbar connection Busbar connection1)

• Terminal screw -- M6 x 20• Tightening torque Nm -- 4 ... 6• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)

- finely stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 2 x 70- stranded with cable lug mm2 -- 3 x 70- AWG cables, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG -- 2/0- with connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 12

Connection type Cage Clamp terminals on request• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)

- solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) --- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) --- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) --- stranded mm2 -- --- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) --

1) The box terminal is removable. Rail and cable lug connections are possible if the box terminal is removed.2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.



Type LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3Size 00 0 2 3Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm Auxiliary circuit

Number of NO contacts 1Number of NC contacts 1Auxiliary contacts – assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped",

1 NC for disconnecting the contactorRated insulation voltage Ui V 690(degree of pollution 3)Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts• NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,

rated operational current Ie at Ue:- 24 V A 4- 120 V A 4- 125 V A 4- 230 V A 3- 400 V A 2- 600 V A 0.6- 690 V A 0.5

• NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue:- 24 V A 3- 120 V A 3- 125 V A 3- 230 V A 2- 400 V A 1- 600 V A 0.6- 690 V A 0.5

• NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13, rated operational current Ie at Ue:- 24 V A 1- 60 V A 1)

- 110 V A 0.22- 125 V A 0.22- 220 V A 0.11

• Continuous thermal current Ith A 62)

• Contact reliability (suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA) YesShort-circuit protection• With fuse

- gL/gG operational class A 6- Quick A 10

•With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 6Safe isolation between main and auxiliary conducting V 415path acc. to IEC 60947-1

CSA, UL, UR rated dataAuxiliary circuit – switching capacity B600, R300

Connection of the auxiliary circuitConnection type Screw terminals• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors

- solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)3) , 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)3)

- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)3), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)3)

- stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)3), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)3)

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)Connection type Cage Clamp terminals on request• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)

- solid 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)- finely stranded without end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)- finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)- stranded --- AWG cables, solid or stranded 2 x (24 ... 14)

1) On request.2) Up to I k ≤ 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V.3) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified.

If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 00 AND SIZE 0

Page

154


Overload relays 3 kW � LSSD/LSDD07 4 kW � LSSD/LSDD09 5.5 kW � LSSD/LSDD12 UL-listed fuses Setting range Ie max = 7 A Ie max = 9 A Ie max = 12 A RK5

(at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC)A gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 ASize 000.11 ... 0.16 0.5 -- -- 0.5 -- – 0.5 – – 10.14 ... 0.2 1 -- -- 1 -- – 1 – – 10.18 ... 0.25 1 -- -- 1 -- – 1 – – 10.22 ... 0.32 1.6 -- 2 1.6 -- 2 1.6 – 2 10.28 ... 0.4 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 – 2 1.60.35 ... 0.5 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 – 2 20.45 ... 0.63 2 -- 4 2 -- 4 2 – 4 2.50.55 ... 0.8 4 -- 4 4 -- 4 4 – 4 30.7 ... 1 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 – 6 40.9 ... 1.25 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 – 6 51.1 ... 1.6 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 – 10 61.4 ... 2 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 – 10 81.8 ... 2.5 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 – 10 102.2 ... 3.2 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 10 – 16 122.8 ... 4 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 – 16 163.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 204.5 ... 6.3 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 255.5 ... 8 20 10 20 20 10 20 20 10 20 307 ... 10 -- -- -- 20 16 20 20 16 20 409 ... 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- 20 16 25 45

Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feedersWith short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination "2"1)

Overload relays 5.5 kW � LSS0/LSD012 7.5 kW � LSS0/LSD017 5.5 kW � LSS0/LSD025 UL-listed fuses Setting range Ie max = 12 A Ie max = 17 A Ie max = 25 A RK5

(at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC)A gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 ASize 01.8 ... 2.5 10 – 10 10 – 10 10 – 10 102.2 ... 3.2 10 – 16 10 – 16 10 – 16 122.8 ... 4 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 – 16 163.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 204.5 ... 6.3 20 6 25 20 6 25 20 6 25 255.5 ... 8 25 10 25/322) 25 10 25/322) 25 10 32 307 ... 10 25 16 25/322) 25 16 25/322) 32 16 35 409 ... 12.5 25 20 25/322) 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 4511 ... 16 25 20 25/322) 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 6014 ... 20 -- -- -- 25 20 25/322) 35 20 35 8017 ... 22 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 8020 ... 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 100

1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to IEC60947-4-1: The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. Type of coordination 1: The contactor or the starter may be non-operational after every short-circuit release. Type of coordination 2: The contactor or the starter must be operational after a short-circuit release (without replacement of parts). Welding of the contacts is permissible however.

2) At max. 415 V.


W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 2 AND SIZE 3

Overload relays 3 kW � LSD232 4 kW � LSD240 5.5 kW � LSD250 UL-listed fuses Setting range Ie max = 32 A Ie max = 40 A Ie max = 50 A RK5

(at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC)A gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 ASize 25.5 ... 8 25 10 25 25 10 25 25 10 25 307 ... 10 32 16 32 32 16 32 32 16 32 409 ... 12.5 35 16 35 35 16 35 35 16 35 5011 ... 16 40 20 40 40 20 40 40 20 40 6014 ... 20 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 8018 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 10022 ... 32 63 35 63 63 35 63 80 35 80 12528 ... 40 63 50 63 63 50 63 80 50 80 15036 ... 45 -- -- -- 63 50 80 80 50 80 17540 ... 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 80 50 80 200

Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feedersWith short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination "2"1)

Overload relays 30 kW � LSD365 37 kW � LSD380 45 kW � LSD395 UL-listed fuses Setting range Ie max = 65 A Ie max = 80 A Ie max = 95 A RK5

(at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC)A gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 ASize 318 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 10022 ... 32 80 35 80 80 35 80 80 35 80 12528 ... 40 80 50 80 80 50 80 80 50 80 15036 ... 50 125 50 125 125 50 125 125 50 125 20045 ... 63 125 63 125 160 63 160 160 63 160 25057 ... 75 -- -- -- 160 80 160 160 80 160 30070 ... 90 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 35080 ... 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350

1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to IEC60947-4-1: The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit. Type of coordination 1: The contactor or the starter may be non-operational after every short-circuit release. Type of coordination 2: The contactor or the starter must be operational after a short-circuit release (without replacement of parts). Welding of the contacts is permissible however.

ACCESSORIES

W ACCESSORIES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

The following accessories are available for the LST thermal overload relays:

• For the four overload relay sizes 00 to 3 one terminal bracket each for stand-alone installation

• One mechanical RESET module for all sizes on request

• One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to access (for all sizes) on request

• Terminal covers

Stand-alone holder

W OVERVIEW

W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Type LSZDTE01 LSZ0TE01 LSZ2TE01 LSZ3TE01For overload relays LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3Mounting type For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rails, size S3 also for TH 75 standard mounting railsConnection for main circuitConnection type Screw terminals Screw terminals with box terminal• Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4 mm• Conductor cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors

- solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x (1 ... 6), 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)max. 1 x (... 4) max. 1 x (... 10)

- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 x (1 ... 6) 2 x (0.75 ... 16), 2 x (2.5 ... 35),

1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)- stranded mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x (1 ... 6), 2 x (0.75 ... 25), 2 x (10 ... 50),

max. 1 x (... 4) max. 1 x (... 10) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 1 x (18 ... 14) 1 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3), 2 x (10 ... 1/0),

1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)- ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)

CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

10

100

1000

10 000

5000

2000

500

200

50

20

5

2

1

1

2

5

10

4060

100

0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 x � nA

s

15

Tripping time

3-poleloading

2-poleloading

Current

min

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS – CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

W SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF A CHARACTERISTIC CURVE

The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the setcurrent Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads from the cold state. The smallest current used fortripping is called the minimum tripping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must be within specified limits.The limits of the minimum tripping current for the LST thermal overload relays for symmetrical three-pole loads are between 105 % and 120 % of the set current. The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping current andcontinues with higher tripping currents based on the characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10, CLASS 20etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set currentIe from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads.

The tripping characteristic for a three-pole LST thermal overload relay (see characteristic curve for symmetrical three-poleloads from the cold state) only applies if all three bimetal strips are simultaneously loaded with the same current. If onlytwo bimetal strips are heated due to a phase failure, these two strips alone must generate the necessary force to triggerthe tripping mechanism which would result in a longer tripping time or require a higher current. If these higher currentsare applied over a longer period, they usually cause damage to the load. To avoid damage, the LST thermal overloadrelays are fitted with phase failure sensitivity which ensures faster tripping in accordance with the characteristic curve fordouble-pole loads from the cold state by means of a suitable mechanical mechanism. Compared with a cold load, a loadat operating temperature obviously has a lower temperature reserve. This is taken into account by the LST thermal over-load relays by reducing the tripping time to about 25 % when loaded with the set current Ie for an extended period.

The tripping times are as follows for:

The characteristic curves for the individual LST thermal overload relays can be requested from Technical Assistance.

Trip class Tripping times

CLASS 10A 2 s ... 10 s

CLASS 10 4 s ... 10 s

CLASS 20 6 s ... 20 s

CLASS 30 9 s ... 30 s

DIMENSIONS

W SCREW CONNECTIONLateral distance to grounded components: at least 6 mm.

W LSTD, SIZE 00with mechanical RESET (on request)

W LST0, SIZE 0with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation



15,5

61

118

10

24 4

147

455 33

4968

max. 185148

17,446

min. 28...max. 130

1232

12

max. 82) 1)

3)

4)5)

� �

�

�

� � � � �

� �

��

��

��

��

��

�

� � �

� �

�

� �

� �

�

��

�

��

�

� � �

�

�

� �

�

�

�

1) Mechanical RESET.2) Cable release (400 or 600 mm long, mounting on the front or laterally on the holder).3) Holder for RESET.4) Pushbutton.5) Extension plunger.6) For mounting on TH35-7,5 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715.

7) For mounting on TH35-15 or TH75 standard mounting rail acc. to EN 607 15

6)

6)

6)

6) For mounting on TH35-7,5 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715.

6) For mounting on TH35-7,5 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715.

7)

SCHEMATICS

� �

� �

� �

� � � � � � � � ��

� � � � � � � � �

��

��

��

4 62

1 3 5

4 62

1 3 5

� �

� �

� �

� ��

� � � � � � � � �

��

��

��

W INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

W PROTECTION OF DC MOTORS

+ + –

W LSTD

W 1-POLE W 2-POLE

W LST0, LST2, LST3

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

W LSTDwith LSZDTE01

W LST0, LST2, LST3with LST0TE01, LST2TE01, LST3TE01

1L1 3L2 5L3

2T1 4T2 6T3 14/22

95 96 97 98 A2

1L1 3L2 5L3

2T1 4T2 6T3

95 96 97 98

LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYSFOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYWITH HAND RESET

TOP-TECHNIC

LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

Page

161

LA THERMAL OVERLOADRELAYS FOR MINIATURPOWER CONTACTORS

w CONTENTS


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................

DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 166

SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 167

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

Page

162



Thermal overload relays 0,12 – 0,18A LA100300











Thermal overload relays 8,0 – 11A LA100311

Thermal overload relays 10 – 14A LA100312

LA100300

W LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS WITH HAND RESET


Page

163

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

W RELAYS WITH STANDARD TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC FOR LA1003..

Setting Range:Tripping time depending on the multiple of the current setting from cold condition (tolerance ±20% of the tripping time)

W EXAMPLE OF SELECTION FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY LA1003..

Technical data of a motor PN = 1,5 kW IN = 3,6 A IA/IN = 5 tE time = 14 s

LA100302 (2,7- 4 A)Tripping time at 5 x IN = 9,9 s9,9 s + 20% tolerance = 11,9 s < tE Motor = 8 sThe device is suitable.

Type Setting Range IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / INA 3 4 5 6 7,2 8

LA1003.. s s s s s s0,12 – 0,18 18,5 10,4 7,2 5,5 4,3 3,60,18 – 0,27 16,7 9,8 6,5 5 4,1 3,50,27 – 0,4 19,4 12,1 8,2 5,9 4,9 4,20,4 – 0,6 18,7 11,2 8 6 4,9 4,10,6 – 0,9 19,7 11,6 8,1 6,1 4,9 4,20,8 – 1,2 22,9 13,6 10 7,3 6 5,21,2 – 1,8 22,2 13,2 9,2 7,6 5,8 5,31,8 – 2,7 23 13,7 9,3 7,6 5,7 5,12,7 – 4 24 14,4 9,9 7,8 5,9 5,14 – 6 24,7 13,8 9,9 7,3 5,6 4,86 – 9 22 13,4 8 5,7 4,1 3,58 – 11 17,4 9,2 5,9 4,1 2,9 2,310 – 14 26,4 12,9 7,6 5,2 3,5 2,8

Max. fuse size according to coordination-type Fuse UL SCCR3)

Type Setting Range "2" 1) "1" 1)

DOL YΔ quick slow, gL (gG) slow, gL (gG) aMA A A A A A A kA

LA1003.. 0,12 – 0,18 – 0,5 2) 0,5 2) 25 - 15 50,18 – 0,27 – 1,0 2) 1,0 2) 25 - 15 50,27 – 0,4 – 2 2 25 - 15 50,4 – 0,6 – 2 2 25 - 15 50,6 – 0,9 – 4 4 25 - 15 50,8 – 1,2 – 4 4 25 2 15 51,2 – 1,8 – 6 6 25 2 15 51,8 – 2,7 – 10 10 25 4 15 52,7 – 4 – 16 10 25 4 15 54 – 6 7,5 – 10,5 20 16 25 6 15 56 – 9 10,5 – 15,5 35 25 35 10 25 58 – 11 14 – 19 35 25 35 16 30 510 – 14 18 – 24 50 35 63 16 40 5

1) Coordination-type according to IEC 947-4-1: "2": Light contact welding accepted. Thermal overload relay must not be damaged."1": Welding of contactor and damage of the thermal overload relay allowed.

2) Miniature fuse

W FUSES FOR LA1003..


Page

164

W TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS FOR LA1003..

Detailed tripping times for each range see table on page before.

Average value of typicaltolerance curves fromcold condition

Proceeding from servicecondition the timesdecrease to 20-30% ofthe characteristic values

with two-pole load

Tripping timemin. s

Typical tolerance curvefrom cold condition

Proceeding from servicecondition the timesdecrease to 70-80% ofthe characteristic values

K =Imax /Ie

KImax = max. phase currentIe = max. scale value

with three-phase load

Tripping timemin. s

F. L. C. multiplication factor


Page

165

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORSacc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1

Contactor Type LA1003..Main contacts

Rated insulation voltage Ui1) V ~ 690

Permissible ambient temperature

operation open °C -25 to +60

storage °C -50 to +70

Trip class

according to IEC 947-4-1 10A

Cable cross-section

Main connector solid or stranded mm² 0,75-6+0,75-2,5 2)

flexible mm² 0,75-4+0,5-2,5 2)

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-2,5+0,5-1,5

Cables per clamp number 1+1

Auxiliary connector solid mm² 0,75-2,5 2)

flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 2)

flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5

Cables per clamp number 2

Auxiliary contacts

Rated insulation voltage Ui1)

same potential V ~ 690

different potential V ~ 440



230V A 3

400V A 2

690V A 0,6


Rated operational current Ie 24V A 1,2

110V A 0,15

220V A 0,1

Short circuit protection (without welding 1kA)

highest fuse rating gL (gG) A 6

Power loss per current path (max.)

minimum setting value W 1,1

maximum setting value W 2,3

1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 4kV (at 440V), 6kV (at 690V). Data for other conditions on request.2) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor.

W TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION

In case of higher ambient temperature use the following formula:(Ambient temperature - 20) x 0,125 = correction factor in % of the full load motor current

Example:Ambient temperature 70°C, full load motor current 7A(70 - 20) x 0,125 = 6,25%Setting value: 7A + 6,25% = 7,44A

DIMENSIONS

Page

166

-12

W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1003..

W LA1003.. (+ CONTACTOR LA1009..)

Contacor

Thermal overload relay

SCHEMATICS

Page

167

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

W LA1003.. manual reset

W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS

W LA1003..

ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A

Page

168

BESD....

BES2....

TOP-TECHNIC

BES3....

TOP-TECHNIC

BES0....


ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A

Page

169

ALEA MOTOR PROTECTIONSWITCHES UP TO 100A

w CONTENTS

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. Page 170




ACCESSORIES........................................................................................................ Page 188

CHARAKTERISTIC CURVES.............................................................................. Page 190

DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 191

SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 195

TYPE BESD / BES0 / BES2 / BES3

APPLICATIONS

System protection ✓1)

Motor protection ✓SIZE S00, S0, S2, S3

RATED CURRENT In

SIZE S00 up to 12A

SIZE S0 up to 25A

SIZE S2 up to 50A

SIZE S3 up to 100A

RATED OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE Ue ACCORDING TO IEC 690 VAC2)

RATED FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz

TRIP CLASS Class 10

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELEASE 0.11 ... 0.16A

up to 80 ... 100A

ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS A multiple of the rated current 13 Times

SHORT-CIRCUIT BREAKING CAPACITY Icu at 400 VAC 50/100 kA

ACCESSORIES FOR SIZES S00 S0 S2 S3

Auxiliary switches ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Signaling switches -- ✓ ✓ ✓Undervoltage releases ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Shunt trip units ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Insulated three-phase busbar systems ✓ ✓ ✓ --

Busbar adapters ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms -- ✓ ✓ ✓Link modules ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓Enclosures for surface mounting ✓ ✓ ✓ --

Infeed terminal ✓ ✓ ✓ --

1) For symmetrical loading of the three phases.2) 500 V AC with moulded-plastic enclosure.

✓ Has this function or can use this accessory.

-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory.

W BES – OVERVIEW

BESD.... BES0.... BES2.... BES3....

MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A


Page

171

W BES – OVERVIEW

The following illustrations show our BES motor protection switches with the accessories which can be mounted for the various sizes.

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 00, WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 0, 2 OR 3, WITH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES

Mountable accessories for all sizes 00 ... 3:1. Transverse auxiliary switch 2. Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts4. Shunt release5. Undervoltage release

Mountable accessories for sizes:6.1. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 006.2. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 0 ... 37. Signaling switch 0 ... 3


Page

172

W BES – OVERVIEW

Mounting location and functionThe BES motor protection switches have three main contact elements. In order to achieve maximum flexibility, auxiliary switches, signaling switches, auxiliary trip units and door coupling rotary operating mechanism can be supplied separately.These components can be fitted as required on the motor protection switches without using tools.

W MOUNTABLE ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

W AUXILIARY SWITCHES, SIGNALING SWITCHES, SHUNT TRIPS AND UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES

Front sideNotes:• A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts

with auxiliary switches can be attached to each motor protection switch.

Left-hand sideNotes:• A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts

with auxiliary switches can be attached to each motor protection switch.

• Auxiliary switches (2 contacts)and signaling switches can bemounted separately or together.

Right-hand sideNotes:• One auxiliary trip unit can be

mounted per motor protection switch.

Transverse auxiliary switches1 NO + 1 NC / 2 NO

Lateral auxiliary switches(2 contacts)1 NO + 1 NC / 2 NO

Signaling switches for sizes 0, 2 and 3Tripping 1 NO + 1 NCShort-circuit 1 NO + 1 NC

Shunt trip units

or

Undervoltage releases

An auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front. The overall width of the motor protection switches remains unchanged.

One of the two auxiliary switches can be mounted laterally for each motor protectionswitches The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with the maincontacts of the motor protection switches. The overall width of the lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts is 9 mm.

One signaling switch can be mounted at the side of each motor protection switcheswith a rotary operating mechanism. The signaling switch has two contact systems.One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was causedby a short-circuit, an overload or an auxiliary trip unit. The other contact system only switches in the event of a short-circuit. There is no signaling as a result of switchingoff with the handle. In order to be able to switch on the motor protection switchesagain after a short-circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the errorcause has been eliminated. The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm.

For remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection switches. The release coilshould only be energized for short periods (see schematics).

Trips the motor protection switches when the voltage is interrupted and prevents themotor from being restarted accidentally when the voltage is restored. Used for remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection switches. Particularly suitable forEMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of the corresponding EMERGENCY-STOPpushbutton according to DIN VDE 0113.

W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) SIZE 0 TO 3

W SCHRACK INFOMotor protection switches with a rotary operating mechanism can be mounted in a controlcabinet and operated externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism.When the cabinet door with motor protection switches is closed, the operating mechanismis coupled. When the motor protection switches closes, the coupling is locked which prevents the door from being opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by themaintenance personnel. In the open position, the rotary operating mechanism can be secured against reclosing with up to 3 padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not possible in this case either.

W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS


ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISM

Rotary operating (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00010

Rotary operating, emergency stop (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00011


Page

173

W BES – GENERAL INFORMATIONS

W SCHRACK INFOBES motor protection switches are compact, current limiting motor protection switches which areoptimized for load feeders. The motor protection switches are used for switching and protectinginduction motors of up to 45 kW at 400 V AC and for other loads with rated currents of up to 100A.

W TYPE OF CONSTRUCTIONThe motor protection switches are available in four sizes:• Size 00 – width 45 mm, max. rated current 12 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 5.5 kW.• Size 0 – width 45 mm, max. rated current 25 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 11 kW.• Size 2 – width 55 mm, max. rated current 50 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 22 kW.• Size 3 – width 70 mm, max. rated current 100 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 45 kW.

W NOTETechnical specifications by green backgrounds. The devices with Cage Clamp terminals are on request.

W SCREW TERMINALSBES motor protection switches of sizes 00 and 0 are fitted with terminals with captive screws and clamping pieces, allowingthe connection of 2 conductors with different cross-sections. The box terminals of the size 2 and 3 motor protection switchesalso enable 2 conductors with different cross-sections to be connected. With the exception of size 3 motor protection switcheswhich are equipped with 4 mm Allen screws, all terminal screws are tightened with a Pozidriv screwdriver size 2. The box terminals of the size 3 motor protection switches can be removed in order to connect conductors with cable lugs or connectingbars. A terminal cover is available as touch protection and to ensure that the required clearances and creepage distances are maintained if the box terminals are removed.

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 00 WITH CAGE CLAMP TERMINALS (ON REQUEST)

W SCHRACK INFOAs an alternative to screw terminals, size 00 motor protection switches are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. Thisscrewless connection method, already familiar from terminal blocks, clamps the conductors using a spring-loaded terminal andis shock-proof and vibration-proof. Motor protection switches with Cage Clamp terminals allow independent connection of twoconductors per terminal.

W MOUNTINGThe motor protection switches are snap-fitted an a 35 mm standard mounting rail to EN 60715. A standard mounting rail witha height of 15 mm is required for size S3 motor protection switches. A 75 mm standard mounting rail can be used as an alternative for size 3. Size 2 and 3 motor protection switches can also be screwed directly onto a base plate.


Page

174

W BES – GENERAL INFORMATIONSWhen mounting the motor protection switches, the following clearances must be maintained to grounded or live parts andto cable ducts made of molded plastic.

Motor protect o /circuit breakers

Distance to grounded orlive parts acc. to IEC 60947-2

Type Size Ue

V

Y

mm

X

mm

Z

mm

S00 up to 690 20 70 9

S0 up to 500up to 690

3050

9090

930

S2 up to 690 50 140 30

S3 up to 240up to 440up to 500up to 690

5070110150

167167167167

10101030

XZ Z

YY

1L1 3L2 5L3

2T1 4T2 6T3

1L1 3L2 5L3

2T1 4T2 6T3

BESD

BES0

BES2

BES3

i n switches

BES BESBES

W INSTALLATION GUIDELINES, FUNCTION AND CONFIGURATION

W TRIP UNITSBES motor protection switches are equipped with inverse-time delayed overload release based on the bimetal principle and with instantaneous electronic trip units (electromagnetic shortcircuit releases). The overload releases can be adjusted in accordance with the load current. The electronic trip units are permanently set to a value 13 times the rated current and thus enable trouble-free starting of motors. The scale cover can be sealed to prevent unauthorized adjustments to the set current.

W TRIP CLASSESThe trip classes of thermally delayed trip units are based on the tripping time (tA) at 7.2 times the set current in cold state (excerpt from IEC 60947-4):• CLASS 10: 4 s < tA < 10 sThe motor protection switches must trip within this time!

W OPERATING MECHANISMSSize 00 motor protection switches are actuated by a rocker operating mechanism and size 0, 2 and 3 motor protection switches by a rotary operating mechanism. If the motor protection switches trips, the rotary operating mechanism switches to the tripped position to indicate this. Before the motor protection switches is reclosed, the rotary operating mechanism must be reset manually to the 0 position. Only then can the motor protection switches be set again to the I position. In the case of motor protection switches with rotary operating mechanisms, an electrical signal can be output by a signaling switch to indicate that the motor starter protector has tripped. All operating mechanisms can be locked in the 0 position with a padlock (shackle diameter 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm). The motor protection switches isolating function complies with IEC 60947-2.

W PREVENTION OF UNINTENDED TRIPPINGIn order to prevent premature tripping due to the integrated phase failure sensitivity, motor protection switches should alwaysbe connected to ensure current flows through all three main current paths.

W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTIONIf a short-circuit occurs, the short-circuit releases of BES motor protection switches isolate the faulty load feeder from the network and thus prevent further damage. Motor protection switches with a short-circuit breaking capacity of 50 kA or 100 kA are virtually short-circuit resistant at a voltage of 400 V AC, since higher short-circuit currents are not to be expected in practice.

W MOTOR PROTECTIONThe tripping characteristics of BES motor protection switches are designed mainly to protect induction motors. The motor protec-tion switches are therefore also referred to as motor circuit breakers. The rated current In of the motor to be protected is set on the setting scale. Factory setting of the short-circuit release is 13 times the rated current of the motor protection switches. This permits trouble-free starting and ensures that the motor is properly protected. The phase failure sensitivity of the motor protection switches ensures that it is tripped in time in the event of a phase failure and overcurrents that occur as a result in the other phases. Motor protection switches with thermal overload releases are normally designed in accordance with trip class 10.


Page

175

W SYSTEM PROTECTIONThe BES motor protection switches for motor protection are also suitable for plant protection. In order to prevent premature tripping due to phase failure sensitivity, the three conducting paths must always be uniformly loaded. The conducting paths must be connected in series the case of single-phase loads.

W SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION FOR STARTER COMBINATIONSThe BES motor protection switches for starter combinations in sizes 0, 2 and 3 provide short-circuit protection with the help of a contactor and overload relay combination. Like the motor protection switches for motor protection, they are equipped with short-circuit releases which are permanently set to a value equivalent to 13 times the rated current of the motorprotection switches. They are not equipped with overload releases. On overload, the overload relay triggers the contactor, the motor protection switches remains closed. Only when a short-circuit occurs in the feeder does the motor protection switches trip as well. The motor protection switches for starter combinations must always be used in combination with an overload relay because the motor protection switches alone cannot protect the motor and itself against overload.

W MAIN AND EMERGENCY-STOP SWITCHESThe BES motor protection switches comply with the isolating function to IEC 60947-2, therefore they can be used – taking IEC60204-1 into account – as main and EMERGENCY-STOP switches. BES door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for heavy duty also comply with the requirements for the isolating function.

W USE OF IT SYSTEMS (IT NETWORKS)BES motor protection switches are suitable for operation in IT systems according to IEC 60947-2. In the event of a 3-pole short-circuit, their response in this system is the same as in others: Therefore, the same short-circuit breaking capacity Icu andIcs applies, see "Technical specifications". An initial fault (ground fault) does not necessarily force immediate disconnection of the network when operating IT systems. If a second independent error occurs (ground fault), the switching capacity of the motor protection switches might be reduced. This is the case if both ground faults occur in different phases and if one of the ground faults occurs on the input side and the other on the outgoing terminal of the motor protection switches. In order to maintain the short-circuit function of the motor protection switches even with two independent ground faults (doubleground faults), the reduced short-circuit breaking capacity with double ground faults must be taken into account in IT systemsIcuIT (see "Technical specifications"). If a ground fault is instantaneously recognized and remedied (ground-fault monitoring), the risk of double ground fault and thus reduced short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT can be minimized.

W SWITCHING OF DC CURRENTSBES motor protection switches for alternating currents are also suitable for DC switching. The maximum permissible DC voltage per conducting path must, however, be adhered to. Higher voltages require a series connection with 2 or 3 conducting paths. The response values of the overload release remain unchanged; the response values of a short-circuit release increase by approximately 30 % for DC. The example circuits for DC switching can be seen in the table below.

Example circuit for size S00 to S3 BES motor protection switches

Example circuit for size S00 to S3 BESmotor protect

Maximum permitted DC voltage Ue

Notes

150 V DC 2-pole switching, non-grounded system1)

If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every ground fault is rectified immediately (ground-fault monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC voltage can be tripled.

300 V DC 2-pole switching, grounded system

The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual conducting path, so that there are always 2 conducting paths in series in the event of a ground fault.

450 V DC 1-pole switching, grounded system

3 conducting paths in series. The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnectedconducting path.

M

L+ L

M

L+ L

M

L+ L

ion switches

1) It is assumed that this circuit always provides safe disconnection even in the event of a double ground fault that bridges two contacts.

W BES – GENERAL INFORMATIONS


Page

176

BESD0063

DESCRIPTION SHORT CIRUIT BRAKING CAPACITY SIZE ORDER NO.

ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH SIZE 00

Motor protection switch 0,16A, Class 10 100kA 00 BESD0016


















Motor protection switch 10A, Class 10 50kA 00 BESD1000

Motor protection switch 12A, Class 10 50kA 00 BESD1200

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00

W SCHRACK INFOFor mounting BESD.. onto contactor size 00 use LSZDD005 (AC-DC).


Page

177



Motor protection switch 0,16A, Class 10 100kA 0 BES00016


















Motor protection switch 10A, Class 10 100kA 0 BES01000






BES00400


W SCHRACK INFOFor mounting BES0.. onto contactor size 0 use LSZ0D002 (AC) or LSZ0D004 (DC). For mounting BES0.. onto contactor size 00 use LSZDD006 (AC-DC).


Page

178














BES2....


BES3....


MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES – ACCESSORIES

Page

179


AUXILLIARY SWITCH

Auxilliary switch side mounted 1 NO + 1 NC 00/0/2/3 BEZ00001

Auxilliary switch front mounted 1 NO + 1 NC 00/0/2/3 BEZ00003

Auxilliary switch side mounted 2 NO 00/0/2/3 BEZ00002

Auxilliary switch front mounted 2 NO 00/0/2/3 BEZ00004

BEZ00001

W AUXILLIARY SWITCH


SIGNALING SWITCH

Signaling switch 1 NO + 1 NC 0/2/3 BEZ00005

BEZ00005

W SIGNALING SWITCH


UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE

Undervoltage release side mounted AC 230V/50HZ, AC 240V/60HZ 00/0/2/3 BEZ00006

Undervoltage release side mounted AC 400V/50HZ, AC 440V/60HZ 00/0/2/3 BEZ00007

BEZ00006

W UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE


Page

180


SHUNT TRIP

Shunt trip side mounted AC 20...24V, 50/60HZ, 100% ED 00/0/2/3 BEZ00008

Shuntt trip side mounted AC 210...240V, 50/60HZ,100% ED 00/0/2/3 BEZ00009

BEZ00009

W SHUNT TRIP


HOUSINGS

Moulded plastic housing, membran IP55 00 BEZ00012

Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop, mushroom head (yellow/red) 00 BEZ00013

Moulded plastic housing, rotary handle IP55 0 BEZ00112

Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop IP55 (yellow/red) 0 BEZ00113

Moulded plastic housing, rotary handle IP55 2 BEZ00212

Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop IP55 (yellow/red) 2 BEZ00213

LOCKING PLATE

Locking plate for 3 padlocks 00 BEZ00014

BEZ00012

W HOUSINGS AND LOCKING PLATE


BUSBARS

3-pole busbar for 2 motor protection switches 00/0 BEZ00017




3-pole busbar for 2 motor protection switches 2 BEZ00217

3-pole busbar for 3 motor protection switches 2 BEZ00218

BEZ00017

W BUSBARS


Page

181


COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE

Cover for spare-place, blank plate (45 mm) 00/0 BEZ00019

Cover for spare-place, blank plate (55 mm) 2 BEZ00219

BEZ00019

W COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE


ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISM

Rotary operating (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00010

Rotary operating, emergency stop (door coupling) yellow/red 0/2/3 BEZ00011

BEZ00010

W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING)


FEED TERMINALS

Feed Terminal Size 00 for 3-phase-busbar (25 mm2) 00 BEZ00016



BEZ00116

W FEED TERMINALS


Page

182

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3

Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, Ics according to IEC 60947-2This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics

of the BES motor protection switches with different inception voltages dependent of the rated current In of the motor protection switches. Motor protection switches infeed is permissible at the upper or lower terminals without restricting the rated data. If the short-circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the rated shortcircuit breaking capacity of the motor protection switches asspecified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. Alternatively, a motor protection switches with a limiter function can be connected upstream.The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in the tables. The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacitythen applies as specified on the fuse.

Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA1) 10 % overvoltage.2) 5 % overvoltage.3) Back-up fuse only required if the short-circuit current at the place of installation > Icu.4) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.

Circuit breakers/ Rated Up to AC 240 V1) Up to AC 400 V1)/415 V2) Up to AC 440 V1)/460 V2) Up to AC 500 V1)/525 V2) Up to AC 690 V1)

Motor starter current Inprotectors Icu Ics max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse

(gL/gG) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)4)

Type A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA ASize 00BESD 0.16 ... 1 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °

1.25; 1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 2 2 202; 2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 10 10 35 2 2 35

3.2; 4 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 40 3 3 40 2 2 405; 6.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 10 50 3 3 50 2 2 508 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 50 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63

10 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 6312 100 100 ° 50 12.5 80 10 10 80 3 3 80 2 2 80

Size 0BES0 0.16 ... 1.6 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 °

2; 2.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 25

3.2 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 8 8 324; 5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 326.3 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 6 3 50

8 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 63 42 21 63 6 3 5010 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 80 42 21 63 6 3 5012.5 100 100 ° 100 100 ° 50 25 80 42 21 80 6 3 6316 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63

20 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 6322; 25 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63

Size 2BES2 16 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 63 5 3 63

20 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 80 5 3 6325 100 100 ° 50 25 100 50 15 100 12 6 80 5 3 6332 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63

40; 45 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 6350 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 80

Size 3BES3 40 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 63

50 100 100 ° 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 8063 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 12 6 100 6 3 80

75 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 10090; 100 100 100 ° 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125


Page

183


Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system (IT network) according to IEC60947-2BES motor protection switches are suitable for operation in IT systems. Values valid for triple-pole short-circuit are Icu up to Ics.In case of double ground fault on different phases at the input and output side of a motor protection switches, the specialshort-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT applies. The specifications in the table below apply to BES motor protection switches. In the colored areas, IcuIT is 100 kA, or in some ranges it is 50 kA. Therefore the motor protection switches are short-circuit resistant in these ranges.If the short-circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the motor protectionswitches as specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified inthe tables. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity then applies as specified on the fuse.

Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA° No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA1) 10 % overvoltage.2) 5 % overvoltage.3) Back-up fuse only required, if short-circuit current at the place of installation > IcuIT.4) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.

Motor starter Rated current Up to AC 240 V1) Up to AC 400 V1)/415 V2) Up to AC 500 V1)/525 V2) Up to AC 690 V1) protectors In IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse

(gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)4) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)

Type A kA A kA A kA A kA ASize 00BESD 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 100 °

0.8; 1 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 2 161.25; 1.6 100 ° 2 20 2 20 2 20

2; 2.5 100 ° 2 35 2 35 2 353.2; 4 100 ° 2 40 2 40 2 405; 6.3 100 ° 2 50 2 50 2 50

8; 10 50 80 2 63 2 63 2 6312 50 80 2 80 2 80 2 80

Size 0BES0 0.16 ... 0.63 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 100 °

0.8; 1 100 ° 100 ° 100 ° 6 161.25; 1.6 100 ° 100 ° 8 20 6 20

2; 2.5 100 ° 8 25 8 25 6 253.2 100 ° 8 32 8 32 6 324; 5 100 ° 6 32 4 32 3 32

6.3... 10 100 ° 6 50 4 50 3 5012.5 100 ° 6 63 4 63 3 6316...25 50 80 4 63 3 63 2 63

Size 2BES2 16 50 100 8 100 6 80 5 63

20 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 6325 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63

32 50 125 6 125 4 100 3 8040... 50 50 160 6 125 4 100 3 80

Size 3BES3 40 50 125 10 63 5 50 5 50

50 50 125 8 80 3 63 3 6363 50 160 6 80 3 63 3 63

75 50 160 5 100 2 80 2 8090; 100 50 160 5 125 2 100 2 100


Page

184


General technical specificationsType BESD BES0 BES2 BES3

Standards• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes• IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) Yes• IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes• UL489, CSA C22.2-No.5-02 NoSize 00 0 2 3Number of poles 3Max. rated current In max (= max. rated operational current Ie) A 12 25 50 100Permissible ambient temperature• Storage/transport °C –50... +80• Operation °C –20... +702)

Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet• +60 °C % 100• +70 °C % 87Motor protection switches/circuit breaker inside enclosurePermissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure• +35 °C % 100• +60 °C % 87Rated operational voltage Ue

• Acc. to IEC V AC 6903)

• Acc. to UL/CSA V AC 600Rated frequency Hz 50/60Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6Utilization categories • IEC 60947-2 (motor protection switches/circuit breaker) A• IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3Trip class CLASS Acc. to IEC60947-4-1 10 10 10 10DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms)• 1 conducting path 150 V DC kA 10• 2 conducting paths in series 300 V DC kA 10• 3 conducting paths in series 450 V DC kA 10Power loss Pv per motor starter In: ... 1.25 A W 5 --protector/circuit breaker In: 1.6 ... 6.3 A W 6 --Dependent on rated current In In: 8 ... 12 A W 7 --(upper setting range) In: ... 0.63 A W -- 5 --

In: 0.8 ... 6.3 A W -- 6 --Rper conducting path = P/I2 x 3 In: 8 ... 16 A W -- 7 --

In: 20 ... 25 A W -- 8 --In: ... 25 A W -- 12 --In: 32 A W 15In: 40 ... 50 A W -- 20 --In: ... 63 A W -- 20In: 75 and 90 A W -- 30In: ... 100 A W -- 38

Shock resistance Acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 25/11 (square and sine pulse)Degree of protection Acc. to IEC 60529 IP204)

Touch protection Acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safeTemperature compensation Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 °C –20 ...+60Phase failure sensitivity Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 YesIsolating function Acc. to IEC 60947-2 YesMain and EMERGENCY-STOP switch Acc. to IEC 60204-1 Yescharacteristics5) (VDE 0113)Safe isolation between main and Acc. to EN 60947-1auxiliary circuits, req. for PELV applications• Up to 400 V + 10 % Yes• Up to 415 V + 5 % (higher voltages on request) YesPermissible mounting positions Any, acc. to IEC60447 start command "I" right-hand side or topMechanical endurance Operating cycles 100000 50000Electrical endurance Operating cycles 100000 25000Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15

2) Above +60°C current reduction. 3) 500V with molded-plastic enclosure. For short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, Ics see table of same name.4) Terminal compartment IP00. 5) With appropriate accessories.


Page

185


Conductor cross-sections of main circuitType BESD BES0 BES2 BES3

Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals with box terminals

Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 4 mm Allen screwPrescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8...1.2 2...2.5 3...4.5 4...6Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)4), 2 x (1... 2.5)4), 2 x (0.75... 16) 2 x (2.5... 16)

2 x (0.75... 2.5)4) 2 x (2.5... 6)4)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)4), 2 x (1... 2.5)4), 2 x (0.75... 16), 2 x (2.5... 35), 2 x (0.75... 2.5)4) 2 x (2.5... 6)4) 1 x (0.75... 25) 1 x (2.5... 50)

• Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)4), 1 x (1... 2.5)4), 2 x (0.75... 25), 2 x (10...50),2 x (0.75... 2.5)4) 2 x (2.5... 6) 1 x (0.75... 35) 1 x (10...50)

• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18... 14) 2 x (14... 10) 2 x (18... 2), 2 x (10... 1/0),1 x (18... 2) 1 x (10... 2/0)

Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)• With copper bars2) -- -- 18 x 10• With cable lugs3) -- -- up to 2 x 70Connection type Cage Clamp terminals5) on requestConductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable) • Solid mm2 2 x (0.25... 2.5) -- --• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25... 1.5) -- --• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25... 2.5) -- --• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24... 14) -- --Max. external diameter of the cable insulation mm 3.6

1) Cable-lug and busbar connection possible after removing the boxterminals.2) If bars larger than 12mmx10mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request). 3) If conductors larger than 25mm2 are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request). 4) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified.

If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply. 5) With conductor cross-sections of " 1mm2 an "insulation stop" must be used.


Page

186


Permissible rated data of devices approved for North America (UL/CSA) motor protection switches of the BES series are approved for UL/CSA and according to UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14 theycan be used on their own or as a load feeder in combination with a contactor. These motor protection switches can be usedas "Manual Motor Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protectionin Group Installations" and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E).

BES motor protection switches as "Manual Motor Controllers"

If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor protection switches is always operated in combination with an upstreamshort-circuit protection device. Approved fuses or a circuit breaker according to UL489/CSAC22.2 No. 5-02 can be used. Thesedevices must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code (UL) or Canadian Electrical Code (CSA).

Motor protection switchess hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated current 240 V AC 480 V AC 600 V ACmax. I n UL CSA UL CSA UL CSA

Ibc3) I bc

3) I bc3) I bc

3) I bc3) I bc

3)

Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA kA kA kASize 00BESD 0.16 ... 2 65 65 65 65 10 10

2.5 65 65 65 65 10 10FLA2) max. 12 A, 115 1/2 -- 3.2 65 65 65 65 10 10600 V 200 1 1/2 3 4 65 65 65 65 10 10NEMA size 00 230 2 3 5 65 65 65 65 10 10

460 -- 7 1/2 6.3 65 65 65 65 10 10575/600 -- 10 8 65 65 65 65 10 10

10 65 65 65 65 10 1012 65 65 65 65 10 10

Size 0BES0 0.16 ... 3.2 65 65 65 65 30 30

4 65 65 65 65 30 30FLA2) max. 25 A, 115 2 -- 5 65 65 65 65 30 30600 V 200 3 5 6.3 65 65 65 65 30 30NEMA size 1 230 3 7 1/2 8 65 65 65 65 30 30

460 -- 15 10 65 65 65 65 30 30575/600 -- 20 12.5 65 65 65 65 30 30

16 65 65 65 65 10 1020 65 65 65 65 10 1022 65 65 65 65 10 1025 65 65 65 65 10 10

Size 2BES2 16 65 65 65 65 30 25

20 65 65 65 65 30 25FLA2) max. 50 A, 115 3 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 25600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 65 65 30 25NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 65 65 30 25

460 -- 40 45 65 65 65 65 30 25575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 65 65 30 25

Size 3BES3 16 65 65 65 65 30 30

20 65 65 65 65 30 30FLA2) max. 99 A, 115 7 1/2 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 30600 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 65 65 30 30NEMA size 3 230 20 40 40 65 65 65 65 30 30

460 -- 75 50 65 65 65 65 30 30575/600 -- 100 63 65 65 65 65 30 30

75 65 65 65 65 30 3090 65 65 65 65 10 10100 65 65 65 65 10 10

1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current.3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.


Page

187


BES motor protection switches as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"

The application as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" is only availablefrom UL. CSA does not recognize this approval! When the motor protection switches is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitablefor Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations", it must always be combined with upstream short-circuit protection. Asshort-circuit-protection device, approved fuses or a motor protection switches according to UL 489 can be used.These devicesmust be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code.

Motor protection switchess hp rating1) for FLA2) Rated current I n 240 V AC Up to 480 V AC Up to 600 V ACMax. UL UL UL

I bc3) I bc

3) I bc3)

Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kASize 00BESD 0.16 ... 0.8 65 65 10

1 65 65 10FLA2) max. 8 A, 115 1/3 -- 1.25 65 65 10480 V 200 3/4 2 2 65 65 10NEMA size 0 230 1 2 2.5 65 65 10

460 -- 5 3.2 65 65 10575/600 -- -- 4 65 65 10

5 65 65 106.3 65 65 108 65 65 10

Size 0BES0 0.16 ... 1.6 65 65 30

2 65 65 30FLA2) max. 115 2 -- 2.5 65 65 3022 A, 480 V 200 3 5 3.2 65 65 3012.5 A, 600 V 230 3 7 1/2 4 65 65 30

460 -- 15 5 65 65 30NEMA size 1 575/600 -- 10 6.3 65 65 30

8 65 65 3010 65 65 3012.5 65 65 30

Size 2BES3 16 65 65 25

20 65 65 25FLA2) max. 115 3 -- 25 65 65 2550 A, 600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 25NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 25

460 -- 40 45 65 65 25575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 25

Size 3BES4 16 65 65 30

20 65 65 30FLA2) max. 115 7 1/2 -- 25 65 65 30100 A, 480 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 3075 A, 600 V 230 20 40 40 65 65 30

460 -- 75 50 65 65 30NEMA size 3 575/600 -- 75 63 65 65 30

75 65 65 3090 65 65 --100 65 65 --

1) hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating). 2) FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current. 3) Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.

Rated data of the auxiliary switches and signaling switchesType Lateral auxiliary Transverse auxiliary switches with

switches with 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NCand signaling switch

Max. rated voltage Acc. to NEMA (UL) VAC 600 250Acc. to NEMA (CSA) VAC 600 250Uninterrupted current A 10 2.5Switching capacity A600 C300

Q300 R300

ACCESSORIES

Page

188

W ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

Front transverse auxiliary switches (front mounted)Switching capacity for different voltages1NO + 1NC, 2NO

Rated operational current Ie• At AC-15, alternating voltage

- 24 V A 2- 230 V A 0.5- 400 V A --- 690 V A --

• At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage- 24 V A 2.5- 230 V A 2.5- 400 V A --- 690 V A --

• At DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200ms- 24 V A 1- 48 V A 0.3- 60 V A 0.15- 110 V A --- 220 V A --

Minimum load capacity V 17mA 1

Lateral auxiliary switches and signaling switch (side mounted)Switching capacity for different voltages1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO and signalling switch

Rated operational current Ie• At AC-15, alternating voltage

- 24 V A 6- 230 V A 4- 400 V A 3- 690 V A 1

• At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage- 24 V A 10- 230 V A 10- 400 V A 10- 690 V A 10

• At DC, direct voltage L/R 200 ms- 24 V A 2- 110 V A 0.5- 220 V A 0.25- 440 V A 0.1

Minimum load capacity V 17mA 1

Auxiliary trip unitsUndervoltage release Shunt trip unit

Power consumption • During pick-up

- AC voltages VA/W 20.2 / 13 20.2 / 13- DC voltages W 20 13 ... 80

• During continuous duty- AC voltages VA/W 7.2 / 2.4 --- DC voltages W 2.1 --

Response voltage• Tripping V 0.35 ... 0.7 x Us 0.7 ... 1.1 x Us• Pickup V 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us --Maximum opening time ms 20

ACCESSORIES

Page

189

W ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits • Melting fuses gL/gG A 10• Miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic A 6 Prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA.

Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuitsConnection type Screw terminalsTerminal screw Pozidriv size 2Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8...1.2Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors) • Solid mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)1)/2 x (0.75... 2.5)1)

• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)1)/2 x (0.75... 2.5)1)

• Stranded mm2 2 x (0.5... 1.5)1)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)

• AWG cables AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)Connection type Cage Clamp terminals2) (on request)Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25... 2.5)• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25... 1.5)• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24... 14)Max. external diameter of the cable insulation mm 3.6

1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.

2) With conductor cross-sections of ≤ 1 mm2 an "insulation stop" must be used;

10

5

2

1

10 000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

0,2

1

0,5

0,02

0,1

0,05

0,002

0,01

0,005

100

6040

2

0,6 0,81 2 3 4 6 8 10

0,00120 30 40 80 x n

min

60

3-pole loadingClass 10

2-pole loadingClass 10

Opening time

Current

CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

W BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES – CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

W REPRESENTATION OF TYPICAL TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC OF BES

The time/current characteristic, the current limiting characteristics and the I2t characteristic curves were determinedaccording to DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 60947. The tripping characteristic of the inverse-time delayed overload release (thermal overload releases, 'a' releases) for DC and AC with a frequency of 0 Hz to 400 Hz applies for the time/currentcharacteristic. The characteristic curves apply to the cold state; at operating temperature, the tripping times of the thermal trip unitsare reduced to approximately 25 %. Under normal operating conditions, all three poles of the device must be loaded.The three main current paths must be connected in series in order to protect single-phase or DC loads.With 2-pole and 3-pole loading, the maximum deviation in the tripping time of 3 times the set current and upwards is±20 % and thus in accordance with DIN VDE 0165. The tripping characteristics for the instantaneous, electromagneticelectronic trip units (short-circuit releases, 'n' releases) are based on the rated current In that also represents the maximum value of the setting range for motor protection switches with adjustable overload releases. If the current is setto a lower value, the tripping current of the 'n' release is increased by a corresponding factor. The characteristic curves of the electromagnetic electronic trip units apply to frequencies of 50 Hz/60 Hz. Appropriatecorrection factors must be used for lower frequencies down to 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up to 400 Hz and forDC.

The above characteristic curve for the motor starter protector relates to a specific setting range. It is, however,also valid as a schematic representation of motor protectionswitches with other current ranges. Time/current characteristic curves, current limiting characteristic curvesand I2t curves are available.

DIMENSIONS

Page

191


1) Side mounted auxiliary switch, 2-pole – BEZ00001,22) Signaling switch (S0 ... S3) side mounted – BEZ000053) Auxiliary trip unit: undervoltage release – BEZ00006,7; shunt trip – BEZ00008,94) Front mounted auxiliary switch – BEZ00003,47) Drilling pattern8) Standard mounting rail TH 35 according to EN 607159) For mounting according to EN 60715 on TH 35 standard mounting rail, 15 mm deep, or TH 75 standard mounting rail10) Allen screw 4 mm11) Lockable in neutral position with 3.5 ... 4.5 mm shackle diameter

3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S2

3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S3

��

��

��

�

�

� ��

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

3RV10 31, 3RV13 31, 3RV14 31

20

55189 18

45 85

109

121

1275

8

132144

140

89125

1) 2)

3)4)

8)

11)

5

30

130

7)

3RV10 4, 3RV13 4

��

� ��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

� �

� � �

� � ��

� � �

�

� �

� �

� � �

�

�

�

��

� �

W BESD MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00

W BES2 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 2



DIMENSIONS

Page

192

W BUSBARS

W 3-PHASE BUSBAR FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 AND 0, MODULAR SPACING 45 mm1)

For two motor protection switches BEZ00017For three motor protection switches BEZ00018For four motor protection switches BEZ00020For five motor protection switches BEZ00021

1) Covers for space place (45 mm)Size 00/0 BEZ00019

2) Covers for space place (55 mm) Size 2 BEZ00219

� � �

� � �

� � �

� �

� �

� �

��

�

�

Size A B

S00 111 67

S0 119 70

W 3-PHASE BUSBAR FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 2, MODULAR SPACING 55 mm2)

For two motor protection switches BEZ00217For three motor protection switches BEZ00218

33

168

98

55

15

110165

33

DIMENSIONS

Page

193

W FEED TERMINALS

W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING)

W BEZ00010/11for motor protection switches size 0, 2, 3Long shaft (with bracket) 3)

W FEED TERMINAL BEZ00216for motor protection switches size 2

��

�

�

� �

W TERMINAL BEZ00016for motor protection switches size 00Connected from top

� ��

��

W TERMINAL BEZ00116for motor protection switches size 0Connected from top

��

��

� �

� �

� �

��

1) Lockable in neutral position with max. 8 mm shackle diameter.2) Mounted with screw cap.3) Supplied with a shaft length of 330 mm; can be adjusted by shortening the shaft.5) Grounding terminal 35 mm2 and sheet-metal bracket for shaft.

DIMENSIONS

Page

194

W MOLDED-PLASTIC ENCLOSURES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING

BEZ00012 with membrane, BEZ00013 with emergency stop mushroom head for motor protection switches size 00

� � � �

� �

� � � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

��

��

��

� �

�

� �

� �

� �

3) Knock-outs for M254) Knock-outs for rear cable entry M206) Max. shackle diameter for padlock 8 mm8) Locking plate BEZ00014 9) EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button

BEZ00112, BEZ00113 with rotary handle and rotary handle for emergency stop for motor protection switches size 0

BEZ00212, BEZ00213 with rotary handleand rotary handle for emergency stop for motor protection switches size 2

� ��

� �

��

��

��

� � � �

�

� �

� �

� �

�

� �

��

��

�

� ��

� �

� � � �

a) 105 mm

1) Knock-outs for M252) Knock-outs for rear cable entry M203) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 ... 8 mm

1) Knock-outs for M32 (left) and M40 (right)2) Knock-outs for rear cable entry M323) Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 ... 8 mm

a) 105 mmb) With EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button: 154 mm

Dimensions refer to mounting surfacec) With EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button: 64 mmd) Dimensions refer to mounting surface

d)d)

W BEZ00112, BEZ00113 – SIZE 0 W BEZ00212, BEZ00213 – SIZE 2

W BEZ00012, BEZ00013 – SIZE 00

SCHEMATICS

Page

195

Lateral auxiliary switch (side mounted) Transverse auxiliary switch (front mounted)BEZ00001 – 1NO + 1NC BEZ00002 – 2NO BEZ00003 – 1NO + 1NC BEZ00004 – 2NO

Signaling switch BEZ00005 – 1NO + 1NC ... overload release Undervoltage release Shunt trip1NO + 1NC ... short circuit release BEZ00006/7 BEZ00008/9

Undervoltage release Shunt trip

W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

W CONTROL DIAGRAMS

W SWITCHING EXAMPLES

��

� �

��

��

� �

BES motor protection switches with BEZ00005 signaling switch

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

� ��

13 23

14 24

S0, S1, S2 OFF pushbutton in the systemQ1 Motor protection switcheS Auxiliary switch of the motor protection switch Q1F1; F2 Fuse (gL/gG) max. 10 AF3 Shunt trip F4 Undervoltage releases

S

Separate "tripped" and "shortcircuit" signals:

S1 Signaling switchQ1 Motor protection switcheF1 Fuse (gL/gG), max. 10 AH1 Signal lamp "Short-circuit"H2 Signal lamp "Overload" or "Tripping by auxiliary trip unit"

� � �

� ��

� ��

� � � ��

� � � � � �

BESD, BES0, BES2, BES3

INDEX

OVERVIEW FOR:LSDD CONTACTORSLSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORSCONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3POLELSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USELSD0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USELSD2 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USELSD3 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USELSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USELSD6 CONTACTORSLSDE CONTACTORSLSDG CONTACTORSLSD CONTACTORSLSDE CONTACTORSLSDG CONTACTORSLSD CONTACTORSLSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORSLST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYSBES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

GENERAL INFORMATIONS FOR:LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLELSS CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLELSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLELSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORSLST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYSBES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS FOR:LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 00LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 2LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 3LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 6/10/12LSD VACUUM CONTACTORS AC3 – 3POLE, SIZE 14LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2/3LSY WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 00/0LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS – 4POLE, SIZE 2/3LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORSLA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORSAUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3KLSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLE, SIZE 00AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD OR LSSD, SIZE 00AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD, LSSD OR LSHD,SIZE 00PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINAL, SIZE 00WIRING SETS, MECHANICAL INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION CLIPS, SIZE 00WYE-DELTA TIMERSCONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES, SIZE 00SOLDER PIN ADAPTER, SIZE 00SURGE SUPRESSORS (PLUG IN TYPE), SIZE 00AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SIDE MOUNTED), SIZE 0-12MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS, SIZE 0-12WIRING SETS FOR REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZE 0-12WIRING SETS FOR YD-ASSEMBLIES AND YD-ACCESSORIES, SIZE 0-3CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES, SIZE 0-3PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINALS, SIZE 0-12SURGE SUPRESSORS, SIZE 0-12CONNECTION CLIPS FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0-3MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK, SIZE 0-2TERMINAL COVERS, SIZE 2-14BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOAD, AC OPERATEDAUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR BZ MODULAR CONTACTORSBZ MODULAR CONTACTOR 4-POLE, SOLENOID OPERATED, SEALABLE

LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 –3POLELA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 –4POLEAUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORSLA1 MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 – 4POLEAUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORSSURGE SUPPRESSOR FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORSLST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 00LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 0LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 2LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 3HOLDER FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYLA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS WITH HAND RESETBES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 0BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 2BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 3AUXILLIARY SWITCH FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHSIGNALING SWITCH FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHUNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHSHUNT TRIP FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHHOUSINGS AND LOCKING PLATE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHBUSBARS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHCOVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHFEED TERMINALS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR:LSD CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 3 ... 250 kWLSS CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 3 ... 250 kWLSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 335 ... 450 kWLSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADSLSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, 4POLELSS CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USEACCESSORIES FOR LSD AND LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORSLSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORSLA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORSLSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIESWYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIESLSY COMPLETE UNITSMODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R..CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R.., K1R40 AND AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK RH11MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009..MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LA1007..MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORSACCESSORY FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORSTHERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LSTDTHERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LST0THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LST2THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LST3THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 00THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 2THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 0THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 3ACCESSORIES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYSTHERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORSTRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS FOR LA1003..THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORSBES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES

664677778889

10101112

144170

13151517

146175

1820202121222223232424252526

26262727

272828282929293030

303131323232

124125125

134

134134135135135149149150150150162176177178178179179179180180180181181181

333371798388899092959799

126

130

130136138139139151151151151154155154155156

163164

165182188

INDEX

Page

197

DIMENSIONS FOR:LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLELSD2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2LSD3 CONTACTORS, SIZE 3LSD6 CONTACTORS, SIZE 6LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZE 10LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZE 12LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14LSRD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00LSR0 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0LSR2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2LSR3 CONTACTORS, SIZE 3LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00LSHD...N, LSHD...G AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00LSKD CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 00LSK0 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0LSK3 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 3LA3K18..LA3K24.., LA3K32..LA3K50.., LA3K62.., LA3K74..LA3K90.., LA3K11..LSZDD003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00LSZDD004 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00LSZ0D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0LSZ2D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0LSZ00113 MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCKLSZ2D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 2LSZ3D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 3LSZDH5.., LSZDD2..*AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00LSZD0501, LSZD0510 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 AUXILIARYCONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12LSZ0D711, LSZ3D811* AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 (*3) TO 12ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIESLSWD, SIZE 00LSW0, SIZE 0LSW2, SIZE 2LSW3, SIZE 3LSYD, SIZES 00 – 00 – 00LSY0, SIZES 0 – 0 – 0LSY2, SIZES 2 – 2 – 0SCREW CONNECTION LSTD SIZE 00SCREW CONNECTION LSTD SIZE 0SCREW CONNECTION LSTD SIZE 2SCREW CONNECTION LSTD SIZE 3INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYSPOSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYSPROTECTION OF DC MOTORSTHERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORSLA1003..CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 FORMINIATUR POWER CONTACTORSPOSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 FORMINIATUR POWER CONTACTORSBES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3BUSBARS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES3-PHASE FEED TERMINALS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHESROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) FOR BES MOTORPROTECTION SWITCHESMOLDED-PLASTIC ENCLOSURES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING FOR BES MOTORPROTECTION SWITCHES

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

100101101102102103103103104104104104105105106106106107107107107108108108108108108108108109

109109109109110110110110111111111158158158158159159159

166

167

167191192193

193

194

112112112112112112112112112112112112112112113113113

113

113113114114114

114114114115

117118119

120121140141142

142

LIST OF ARTICLES

Page

198

B

BES00016 177

BES00020 177

BES00025 177

BES00032 177

BES00040 177

BES00050 177

BES00063 177

BES00080 177

BES00100 177

BES00125 177

BES00160 177

BES00200 177

BES00250 177

BES00320 177

BES00400 177

BES00500 177

BES00630 177

BES00800 177

BES01000 177

BES01200 177

BES01600 177

BES02000 177

BES02200 177

BES02500 177

BES22500 178

BES23200 178

BES24000 178

BES24500 178

BES25000 178

BES36300 178

BES37500 178

BES39000 178

BES39999 178

BESD0016 176

BESD0020 176

BESD0025 176

BESD0032 176

BESD0040 176

BESD0050 176

BESD0063 176

BESD0080 176

BESD0100 176

BESD0125 176

BESD0160 176

BESD0200 176

BESD0250 176

BESD0320 176

BESD0400 176

BESD0500 176

BESD0630 176

BESD0800 176

BESD1000 176

BESD1200 176

BEZ00001 179

BEZ00002 179

BEZ00003 179

BEZ00004 179

BEZ00005 179

BEZ00006 179

BEZ00007 179

BEZ00008 180

BEZ00009 180

BEZ00010 172

BEZ00011 172

BEZ00011 181

BEZ00012 180

BEZ00013 180

BEZ00014 180

BEZ00016 181

BEZ00017 180

BEZ00018 180

BEZ00019 181

BEZ00020 180

BEZ00021 180

BEZ00112 180

BEZ00113 180

BEZ00116 181

BEZ00212 180

BEZ00213 180

BEZ00216 181

BEZ00217 180

BEZ00218 180

BEZ00219 181

BZ326421 124

BZ326437 124

BZ326438 124

BZ326439 124

BZ326441 125

BZ326442 124

BZ326443 124

BZ326444 124

BZ326445 124

BZ326452 124

BZ326453 124

BZ326460 124

BZ326461 124

BZ326462 124

BZ326463 124

BZ326464 124

BZ326465 124

BZ326466 124

BZ326467 124

BZ326468 124

BZ326469 124

BZ326470 125

BZ326471 124

BZ326474 124

BZ326475 124

BZ326476 124

BZ326479 124

BZ326480 124

BZ326481 124

L

LA100301 162

LA100302 162

LA100303 162

LA100304 162

LA100305 162

LA100306 162

LA100307 162

LA100308 162

LA100309 162

LA100310 162

LA100311 162

LA100312 162

LA100770 135

LA100773 135

LA100774 135

LA100780 135

LA100783 135

LA100790 135

LA100793 135

LA100795 135

LA100910 134

LA100913 134

LA100915 134

LA10091B 134

LA100920 134

LA100923 134

LA100925 134

LA100943 134

LA10094B 134

LA190100 25

LA190101 25

LA190134 25

LA190135 25

LA190150 134

LA190151 134

LA190153 135

LA190154 135

LA190155 135

LA190156 135

LA190194 135

LA3K1133 24

LA3K1813 24

LA3K1823 24

LA3K2433 24

LA3K3233 24

LA3K5033 24

LA3K6233 24

LA3K7433 24

LA3K9033 24

LSD00930 19

LSD00932 19

LSD00933 19

LSD00935 19

LSD01230 19

LSD01232 19

LSD01233 19

LSD01235 19

LSD01730 19

LSD01732 19

LSD01733 19

LSD01734 19

LSD01735 19

LSD02530 19

LSD02532 19

LSD02533 19

LSD02535 19

LSD23230 20

LSD23232 20

LSD23233 20

LSD23235 20

LSD24030 20

LSD24032 20

LSD24033 20

LSD24035 20

LSD25030 20

LSD25032 20

LSD25033 20

LSD25035 20

LSD36530 20

LSD36532 20

LSD36533 20

LSD36535 20

LSD36553 20

LSD38030 20

LSD38032 20

LSD38033 20

LSD38035 20

LSD38050 20

LSD38052 20

LSD39530 20

LSD39533 20

LSD39535 20

LSD39553 20

LSD6115F 21

LSD6155F 21

LSD6195F 21

LSDD0710 18

LSDD0712 18

LSDD0713 18

LSDD0715 18

LSDD0720 18

LSDD0722 18

LSDD0723 18

LSDD0725 18

LSDD0910 18

LSDD0912 18

LSDD0913 18

LSDD0915 18

LSDD0920 18

LSDD0922 18

LSDD0923 18

LSDD0925 18

LSDD1210 18

LSDD1212 18

LSDD1213 18

LSDD1215 18

LSDD1220 18

LSDD1222 18

LSDD1223 18

LSDD1225 18

LSDE225F 21

LSDE265F 21

LSDE305F 21

LSDG415F 21

LSDG515F 21

LSDH63G3 21

LSDH64G3 21

LSDH82G3 21

LSDH83G3 21

LSHD0670 25

LSHD0673 25

LSHD0675 25

LSHD067G 25

LSHD067N 25

LSHD0680 25

LSHD0683 25

LSHD0685 25

LSHD068G 25

LSHD068N 25

LSHD0690 25

LSHD0693 25

LSHD0695 25

LSHD069G 25

LSHD069N 25

LSK03213 24

LSK36213 24

LSKD17B3 24

LSR03540 23

LSR03543 23

LSR03545 23

LSR04040 23

LSR04043 23

LSR04045 23

LSR26040 23

LSR26043 23

LSR26045 23

LSR31140 23

LSR31143 23

LSR31145 23

LSR31440 23

LSR31443 23

LSR31445 23

ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE

LIST OF ARTICLES

Page

199

LSRD1840 23

LSRD1843 23

LSRD1845 23

LSRD2240 23

LSRD2243 23

LSRD2245 23

LSS0123H 19

LSS0173H 19

LSS0253H 19

LSSD071G 18

LSSD072G 18

LSSD091G 18

LSSD092G 18

LSSD121G 18

LSSD122G 18

LST00250 149

LST00320 149

LST00400 149

LST00500 149

LST00630 149

LST00800 149

LST01000 149

LST01250 149

LST01600 149

LST02000 149

LST02200 149

LST02500 149

LST20800 150

LST21000 150

LST21250 150

LST21600 150

LST22000 150

LST22500 150

LST23200 150

LST24000 150

LST24500 150

LST25000 150

LST32500 150

LST33200 150

LST34000 150

LST35000 150

LST36300 150

LST37500 150

LST39000 150

LST39999 150

LSTD0016 149

LSTD0020 149

LSTD0025 149

LSTD0032 149

LSTD0040 149

LSTD0050 149

LSTD0063 149

LSTD0080 149

LSTD0100 149

LSTD0125 149

LSTD0160 149

LSTD0200 149

LSTD0250 149

LSTD0320 149

LSTD0400 149

LSTD0500 149

LSTD0630 149

LSTD0800 149

LSTD1000 149

LSTD1200 149

LSW01233 22

LSW01733 22

LSW02533 22

LSW23233 22

LSW24033 22

LSW25033 22

LSW36533 22

LSW38033 22

LSW39533 22

LSWD0733 22

LSWD0933 22

LSWD1233 22

LSY03233 22

LSY25033 22

LSYD1733 22

LSZ00001 31

LSZ00002 31

LSZ00003 31

LSZ00113 32

LSZ0D001 28

LSZ0D002 30

LSZ0D003 31

LSZ0D004 30

LSZ0D010 28

LSZ0D104F 29

LSZ0D113 29

LSZ0D122 29

LSZ0D122F 29

LSZ0D131 29

LSZ0D131F 29

LSZ0D140F 29

LSZ0D711 29

LSZ0D901 28

LSZ0D910 28

LSZ0TE01 150

LSZ0W001 30

LSZ0W002 29

LSZ0W003 32

LSZ0W004 32

LSZ0Y001 30

LSZ0Y002 31

LSZ20001 31

LSZ2D001 32

LSZ2D002 32

LSZ2D003 31

LSZ2D004 30

LSZ2D005 30

LSZ2TE01 150

LSZ2W001 30

LSZ2W002 32

LSZ2W003 32

LSZ2Y001 30

LSZ2Y002 30

LSZ2Y003 30

LSZ2Y004 30

LSZ2Y005 31

LSZ3D001 31

LSZ3D002 32

LSZ3D003 30

LSZ3D004 30

LSZ3D811 29

LSZ3TE01 150

LSZ3W001 30

LSZ3W002 32

LSZ3Y004 31

LSZ60001 31

LSZ6D001 32

LSZ6D002 32

LSZ6W001 29

LSZ6W002 30

LSZ6Y003 31

LSZD0001 28

LSZD0002 28

LSZD0003 28

LSZD0004 28

LSZD0005 31

LSZD0006 31

LSZD0101 27

LSZD0102 27

LSZD0501 26

LSZD0501 26

LSZD0510 26

LSZD0510 26

LSZDD001 26

LSZDD002 28

LSZDD003 26

LSZDD004 26

LSZDD005 27

LSZDD006 27

LSZDD201 26

LSZDD212 26

LSZDD213 26

LSZDD222 26

LSZDH522 26

LSZDH531 26

LSZDH540 26

LSZDW001 27

LSZDW002 27

LSZDY001 27

LSZDY002 26

LSZED001 32

LSZED002 32

LSZEW001 30

LSZEY003 31

LSZGW001 30

LSZHD001 32

ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE

GENERAL TERMS OF DELIVERY

Page

200

1. Scope 1.1 These General Terms shall govern legal transactions between business en-

terprises, namely the delivery of commodities and, mutatis mutandis, the rendering of services. Software transactions are with precedence governed by the Software Conditions issued by the Austrian Electrical and Electron-ics Industry Association, assembly work by the Terms and Conditions for Assembly Work issued by the Austrian Power Current and Light Current Engineering Industry and/or (where applicable) the Terms and Conditions for the Assembly of Electrical Equipment used in Medicine issued by the Austrian Electrical and Electronics Industry (the current versions are avail-able at www.feei.at).

1.2 Any departure from the terms and conditions mentioned in 1.1 above shall be valid only if expressly accepted in writing by Seller.

2. Submission of offers 2.1 Seller’s offers shall be deemed offers without engagement. 2.2 Tender documents and project documentation must not be duplicated nor

made available to third parties without the permission of Seller. They may be claimed back at any time and shall be returned to Seller immediately if the order is placed elsewhere.

3. Conclusion of contract

of an order received or upon dispatch of a delivery. 3.2 Particulars appearing in catalog, folders etc. as well as any oral or written

statements shall only be binding if Seller makes express reference to them

3.3 Subsequent amendments of or additions to the contract shalI be subject to

4. Prices 4.1 Prices shall be quoted ex works or ex Seller’s warehouse without VAT, pack-

ing and packaging, loading, disassembly, take-back and proper recycling and disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment for commercial

Electrical Equipment. Buyer shall be liable for any and all charges, taxes or other duties levied in respect of delivery. If the terms of delivery include transport to a destination designated by Buyer, transport costs as weIl as the cost of any transport insurance desired by Buyer shall be borne by the latter. Delivery does not, however, include unloading and subsequent handling. Packaging materials will be taken back only by express agreement.

4.2 Seller reserves the right to modify prices if the order placed is not in accord-ance with the offer submitted.

event that the costs have increased by the time of delivery, Seller shall have the right to adjust prices accordingly.

4.4 In carrying out repair orders, Seller shall provide all services deemed ex-pedient and shall charge Buyer for the same on the basis of the work input and/or expenditures required. The same holds for any services or additional services the expediency of which becomes apparent only as the repair order

-quired.

4.5 Expenses for estimates of costs of repair and maintenance or for expert valuations shall be invoiced to Buyer.

5. Delivery 5.1 The period allowed for delivery shall commence at the latest of the follow-

ing dates:

-

c) the date of receipt by Seller of a deposit or security due before delivery of the goods in question.

5.2 Buyer shall obtain whatever licences or approvals may be required from authorities or third parties for the construction of plant and equipment. If the granting of such licences or approvals is delayed for any reason the delivery period shall be extended accordingly.

5.3 Seller may carry out, and charge Buyer for, partial or advance deliveries. If delivery on call is agreed upon, the commodity shall be deemed called off at the Iatest one year after the order was placed.

5.4 In case of unforeseeable circumstances or circumstances beyond the parties control, such as all cases of force majeure, which impede compliance with the agreed period of delivery, the latter shall be extended in any case for the

-ance, damages in transit, energy shortage and raw materials scarcity, labor disputes, and default on performance by a major component supplier who is

irrespective of whether they affect Seller or his subcontractor(s). 5.5 If a contractual penalty for default of delivery was agreed upon by contract-

ing parties when the contract was concluded, it shall be executed as follows, and any deviations concerning individual items shall not affect the remain-ing provisions: Where delay in performance can be shown to have occurred solely through the fault of Seller, Buyer may claim for each completed week of delay an indemnity of at most one half of one per cent, a total of no more than 5 %, however, of the value of that part of the goods to be delivered which cannot be used on account of Seller’s failure to deliver an essential part thereof, provided the Buyer has suffered a damage to the aforesaid extent. Assertion of rights of damages exceeding this extent is precluded.

6. Passage of risk and Place of performance 6.1 Enjoyment and risk shall pass to Buyer at the time of departure of the goods ex

works or ex warehouse regardless of the terms of quotation (such as carriage paid, C.I.F. etc.) agreed upon. This provision also includes the case of shipment being effected, organised and supervised by Seller and the case of delivery be-ing made in connection with assembly work to be undertaken by Seller.

6.2 For services the place of performance shall be the place at which the service

have been agreed upon shall pass to Buyer at the time the services have been rendered.

7. Payment 7.1 Unless otherwise agreed, one third of the purchase price shall fall due at the

half the delivery period has elapsed and the balance at the time of delivery. Irrespective thereof the turnover tax comprised in the amount of the invoice shall be paid within 30 days of the invoice date.

7.2 In the case of part settlements the individual part payments shall fall due upon receipt of the respective invoices. The same shall apply to amounts invoiced for additional deliveries or resulting from additional agreements beyond the scope of the original contract, irrespective of the terms of pay-ment agreed upon for the principal delivery.

7.3 Payment shall be made without any discount free Seller’s domicile in the agreed currency. Drafts and checks shaII be accepted on account of payment only, with all interest, fees and charges in connection therewith (such as col-lection and discounting charges) to be borne by Buyer.

7.4 Buyer shall not be entitled to withhold or offset payment on the grounds of any warranty claims or other counterclaims.

7.5 Payment shall be deemed to have been effected on the date at which the amount in question is at Seller’s disposal.

7.6 If Buyer fails to meet the terms of payment or any other obligation arising from this or other transactions, Seller may without prejudice to his other rights

a) suspend performance of his own obligations until payments have been

period of delivery to a reasonable extent, b) call in debts arisen from this or any other transactions and charge default

interest amounting to 1.25 % per month plus turnover tax for these amounts beginning with the due dates, unless Seller proves costs exceeding this.

In any case Seller has the right to invoice all expenses arising prior to a lawsuit, especially reminder charges and lawyer’s fees.

7.7 Discounts or bonuses are subject to complete payment in due time. 7.8 Seller retains title to all goods delivered by him until receipt of all amounts

invoiced including interests and charges. Buyer herewith assigns his claim out of a resale of conditional commodi-

ties, even if they are processed, transformed or combined with other com-modities, to Seller to secure the latter’s purchase money claim. In the case of resale granting respite Buyer shall have the power of disposal of the prod-uct under retention of ownership only with the proviso that upon reselling

the assignment in his account books. Upon request Buyer has to notify the assigned claim and the debtor thereof to Seller, and to make all information and material required for his debt collection available and to notify the as-signment to the third-party debtor. If the goods are attached or otherwise levied upon, Buyer shalI draw attention to Sellers title and immediately inform Seller of the attachment or levy.

General Terms of Deliveryissued by the Austrian Electrical and Electronics Industry Association

GENERAL TERMS OF DELIVERY

8. Warranty and acceptance of obligation to repair defects

subject to the conditions hereunder, remedy any defect existing at the time of acceptance of the article in question whether due to faulty design, mate-rial or manufacture, that impairs the functioning of said article. From par-ticulars appearing in catalogues, folders, promotional literature as well as written or oral statements which have not been included in the agreement no warranty obligations may be deduced.

8.2 Unless special warranty periods operate for individual items the warranty period shall be 12 months. These conditions shall also apply to any goods

attached to buildings or the ground. The warranty period begins at the point of passage of risk acc. to paragraph 6.

8.3 The foregoing warranty obligations are conditional upon the Buyer giving immediate notice in writing of any defects that have occurred and such no-tice reaching the Seller. Buyer shall prove immediately the presence of a de-fect, in particular he shall make available immediately to Seller all material and data in his possession. Non-observance of Buyer’s obligation to give immediate notice of the defect invalidates the right of claiming consequen-tial harm caused by a defect. Upon receipt of such notice Seller shall, in the case of a defect covered by the warranty under 8.1 above, have the option to replace the defective goods or defective parts thereof or else to repair them on Buyer’s premises or have them returned for repair, or to grant a fair and reasonable price reduction.

8.4 Any expenses incurred in connection with rectifying defects (e. g. expenses for assembly and disassembly, transport, waste disposal, travel and site-to-quarters time) shall be borne by Buyer. For warranty work on Buyer’s premises Buyer shall make available free of charge any assistance, hoisting gear, scaffolding and sundry supplies and incidentals that may he required.

8.5 If an article is manufactured by Seller on the basis of design data, design -

8.6 Seller’s warranty obligation shall not extend to any defects due to assembly and installation work not undertaken by Seller, inadequate equipment, or due to non-compliance with installation requirements and operating con-ditions, overloading of parts in excess of the design values stipulated by Seller, negligent or faulty handling or the use of inappropriate materials, nor for defects attributable to material supplied by Buyer. Nor shall Seller be li-able for damage due to acts of third parties, atmospheric discharges. Excess

-ment of parts subject to natural wear and tear. Seller accepts no warranty for the sale of used goods.

8.7 The warranty shall lapse immediately if, without written consent of Seller, -

tions or repairs on any items delivered. 8.8 Claims acc. to § 933b ABGB are struck by the statute of limitation with

lapse of the period mentioned under point 8.2.8.9 The provisions of sub-paragraphs 8.1 to 8.7 shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to

all cases where the obligation to repair defects has to be accepted for other reasons laid down by law.

9. Withdrawal from contract 9.1 Buyer may withdraw from the contract only in the event of delays caused by

gross negligence on the part of Seller and only after a reasonable period of

registered mail. 9.2 Irrespective of his other rights Seller shall be entitled to withdraw from the

contract a) if the execution of delivery or the inception or continuation of services to

be rendered under the contract is made impossible for reasons within the responsibility of Buyer and if the delay is extended beyond a reasonable

b) if doubts have arisen as to Buyer’s creditworthiness and if same fails, on Seller’s request, to make an advance payment or to provide adequate security prior to delivery, or

c) if, for reasons mentioned in 5.4, the period allowed for delivery is ex-tended by more than half of the period originally agreed or by at least 6 months.

9.3 For the reasons given above withdrawal from the contract shall also be possi-ble in respect of any outstanding part of the delivery or service contracted for.

9.4 If bankruptcy proceedings are instituted against any contracting party or an application for bankruptcy proceedings against that party is not granted

without allowing a period of grace. 9.5 Without prejudice to Seller’s claim for damages including expenses aris-

ing prior to a lawsuit, upon withdrawal from contract any open accounts in respect of deliveries made or services rendered in whole or in part shall be settled according to contract This provision also covers deliveries or serv-ices not yet accepted by Buyer as weIl as any preparatory acts performed by Seller. Seller shall, however, have the option alternatively to require the restitution of articles already delivered.

9.6 Withdrawal from contract shall have no consequences other than those stip-ulated above.

9.7 The assertion of claims on the ground of laesio enormis, error, or lapse of purpose by the Buyer is excluded.

10. Disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment10.1 The Buyer of electrical/electronic equipment for commercial purposes, in-

himself the user of the electrical/electronic equipment. If the Buyer is not

by agreement and furnish proof thereof to the Seller. 10.2 The Buyer incorporated in Austria shall ensure that the Seller is provided

with all information necessary to meet the Seller’s obligations as manu-

-agement Act.

10.3 The Buyer incorporated in Austria is liable vis-à-vis the Seller for any dam-

-tions according to Article 10. The Buyer shall bear the burden of proof of performance of this obligation.

11. Seller’s liability

the damage in question is proved to be due to intentional acts or acts of gross negligence, within the limits of statutory provisions. Seller shall not be li-able for damage due to acts of ordinary negligence nor for consequential

or interest or damage resulting from third-party claims against buyer. 11.2 Seller shall not be liable for damages in case of non-compliance with in-

structions for assembly, commissioning and operation (such as are contained in instructions for use) or non-compliance with licensing requirements.

11.3 Claims that exceed the contractual penalties that were agreed on are ex-cluded from the respective title.

12. Industrial property rights and copyrights 12.1 Buyer shall indemnify Seller and hold him harmless against any claims for

any infringement of industrial property rights raised against him if Seller manufactures an article pursuant to any design data, design drawings, mod-

-cations as well as samples, catalogues, prospectuses, pictures and the like shall remain the intellectual property of Seller and are subject to the relevant statutory provisions governing reproduction, imitation, competition etc. The provisions of 22 above shall also cover design documents.

13. General Should individual provisions of the contract or of these provisions be invalid

the validity of the other provisions shall not be affected. The invalid provi-sion shall be replaced by a valid one, which comes as close to the target goal as possible.

14. Jurisdiction and applicable law Any litigations arising under the contract including litigations over the ex-

istence or non-existence thereof shall fall within the exclusive jurisdiction -

irksgericht Innere Stadt, Vienna, shall have exclusive jurisdiction if Seller is domiciled in Vienna. The contract is subject to Austrian law excluding the referral rules. Application of the UN Convention on Contracts for the lnternational Sale of Goods is renounced.

Last revised in May 2007

HEADQUARTERSSCHRACK TECHNIK GMBH

Seybelgasse 13, A-1230 ViennaPHONE +43(0)1/866 85-5900FAX +43(0)1/866 85-98804E-MAIL [email protected]

THE COMPANY

CONNECTING COMPETENCE.

WWW.SCHRACK.COM

BELGIUMSCHRACK TECHNIK B.V.B.A

Twaalfapostelenstraat 14BE-9051 St-Denijs-WestremPHONE +32 9/384 79 92FAX +32 9/384 87 69E-MAIL [email protected]

CROATIASCHRACK TECHNIK D.O.O.

Zavrtnica 17HR-10000 ZagrebPHONE +385 1/605 55 00FAX +385 1/605 55 66E-MAIL [email protected]

POLANDSCHRACK TECHNIK

POLSKA SP.Z.O.O.

ul. Staniewicka 5PL-03-310 WarszawaPHONE +48 22/331 48 31FAX +48 22/331 48 33E-MAIL [email protected]

ROMANIASCHRACK TECHNIK SRL

Str. Simion Barnutiu nr. 15RO-410204 OradeaPHONE +40 259/435 887FAX +40 259/412 892E-MAIL [email protected]

SERBIASCHRACK TECHNIK D.O.O.

Kumodraska 260RS-11000 BeogradPHONE +38 1/11 309 2600FAX +38 1/11 309 2620E-MAIL [email protected]

SLOVAKIASCHRACK TECHNIK SPOL. SR.O.

Langsfeldova 2SK-03601 MartinPHONE +42 1/43 422 16 41FAX +42 1/43 423 95 56E-MAIL [email protected]

SLOVENIASCHRACK TECHNIK D.O.O.

Pameče 175SLO-2380 Slovenj GradecPHONE +38 6/2 883 92 00FAX +38 6/2 884 34 71E-MAIL [email protected]

CZECH REPUBLICSCHRACK TECHNIK SPOL. SR.O.

Dolnomecholupska 2CZ-10200 Praha 10 – HostivarPHONE +42(0)2/810 08 264FAX +42(0)2/810 08 462E-MAIL [email protected]

HUNGARYSCHRACK TECHNIK KFT.

Vidor u. 5H-1172 BudapestPHONE +36 1/253 14 01FAX +36 1/253 14 91E-MAIL [email protected]

SCHRACK COMPANIES

K-ALEA-EN9

catalog contactoare

Documents

modular system

solder pin

damping opening

voltage frequremark

control supply

cage clamp

cage clamp

delta assembly